Home

Mitel 3300 User's Manual

1. Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT Special Busy 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Special Ringback 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Transfer Dial 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Voice Mail 23 23 18 21 18 18 16 20 Page 2 of 2 E Note DTMF tones are supported 1 Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Germany Tone Plan Tone e Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 Continuous Busy 425 0 1 on 0 4 off repeat Camp on 425 0 25 on off Conference 425 0 25 on off Confirmation 425 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat External Camp on 425 0 1 on 0 05 off 0 1 on 0 05 off Feature Active Dial 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 01 on 0 7 off repeat forever Interrupted Dial 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Message Notification 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 5 off repeat Override 1400 0 2 on off Paging 425 0 25 on off Reorder 425 0 2 on 0 5 off repeat Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 35 on 0 35 off repeat Special Ringbac
2. Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Pin Code ONS EC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk DNIE C Plugs 42 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 17 O Y 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 43 YIG 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3 1 10T 18 G Y 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3 1 10R 44 YIBR 11 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 19 BR Y 11R 6R 6R 356 4R 6R 11R 45 YIS 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 20 S Y 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 46 V BL 13T 4T 7T 13T P2 21 BL V 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 47 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 22 ON 14R 7MWA 7R MR 481 14R 48 V G 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 23 G V 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 49 V BR 16 8MWB 8T MR 4 16T 24 16 8MWA 8R MR 45 16R 50 SPARE 25 SPARE Card Slot 4 Card Slot 4 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Fin Code SNS be LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk pNLL C Plugs 26 W BL 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1 BL W 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 27 WO 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 2 OW 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 28 W G 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 3 GW 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 29 W BR 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1 4T 4 BR W 4 2MWA 2R MR 15 4R 30 W S 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P3 5 S W 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 31 R BL 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2 1 6T 6 BL R 6 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 32 R O 4T 4T 2E 4T 7 O R 7R 4R 4R 256 4R 7R 33 R G 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2 8T 8 G R 8R
3. Spain Tone Plan Tone dir cud Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 Continuous Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat Camp on 425 0 6 on 0 2 off 0 6 on off Conference 1400 0 4 on off Confirmation 425 Continuous Dial 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Interrupted Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 off repeat x 8 then continuous Message Notification 425 440 425 425 0 1 on 01 off x 4 then 440 0 2 on 0 2 off x 2 then 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 4 then 425 continuous Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 1400 0 2 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 425 0 2 on 0 2 off 0 2 on 0 6 off repeat Ringback 425 1 5 on 3 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat Special Ringback 425 0 5 on 0 5 off 0 5 on 2 5 off repeat Transfer Dial 425 0 1 on O s off 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 1 off then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Tone Output Levels iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Busy 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Camp on 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Conference 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Confirmation 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Feature Active Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Interrupted Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Message N
4. Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Italy Tone Plan Tone are Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 0 2 on 0 2 off 0 6 on 1 off repeat forever Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat forever Camp on 425 0 2 on 0 1 off 0 2 on 0 1 off Conference 425 0 2 on off Confirmation 425 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 07 off repeat Dial 350 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 350 425 0 7 on 0 7 off repeat forever Interrupted Dial 425 0 9 on 0 1 off then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Message Notification 425 0 7 on 0 7 off Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 425 0 2 on off Paging 425 0 2 on off Reorder 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat forever Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat forever Special Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Transfer Dial 350 425 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off 24 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Output Levels iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ARS 2nd Dial 17 13 14 12 12 16 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 19 19 18 13 19 Busy 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Dial 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Camp on 17 13 14 12 12 15 16
5. 121 Install the System ID Module 122 Install DSP Modules 123 Configure the 123 Set the 3300 Controller IP Address 125 Install the 3300 Configuration Tool 126 Install and Configure the Java Plug In 127 Program FTP User Account and Password 127 Assign Domain 2 1 128 Configure IIS 5 Settings 128 Install the 3300 Universal NSU 129 Install the 3300 Universal NSU 129 Install for PRVQ SIG 2 cake ned Aide ues Se Se ae day ena 130 Install Direct Connect Device 130 Driver for Windows 95 and Windows 98 130 Driver for Windows 2000 131 Create a Dial up Network Connection 132 Dial up Connection for Windows 95 or Windows 98 132 Dial up Connection for Windows 2000
6. 143 Card Connections to Cross Connect Field 145 Card Sl t unde oie te ee a e ARE 145 Gard Slot 2 zd b vedido rb qur REA Ded nee ee tee EPI 146 Card Sloti3s ces soi nen RR as wo s aaa paui 147 5104 gt sedet oe veo ete oreet te bro Amet bee 148 Card vss e ce eue 150 Card Slot Gi ue eee ope doen ditate eod eit dut 151 Card Slot Erbe RO Gand ea Dh bh 152 GCard Slot 8 i dou seed Am SS S S 153 Card Slot 9 eos sates Be aed pete a aa ya gm qute uhu Mi s ota Se 154 DERE EUER xen E D i EE 155 Card Slot 11 Se Ee Den oem Deed 156 Card Slot 12 ss eoe de db bed xg 157 Install the SUPERSET 158 Overview of the SUPERSET Hub 158 Install the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier 158 Install the SUPERSET HUB 47 159 Install the Digital Service 0 160 Overview of the Digital Service Unit Installation 160 Unpack Position and Ground the DSU
7. 169 Pre Release 3 2 IP Phones 170 Mixed Release 3 1 and 3 2 171 Release 3 3 Table of Contents Chapter 4 Install Upgrades and FRUs Install Upgrades and 6 175 Hardware votes db Goloso RUP RR Nempe Zula aia Seg GLEN yoa Nk 175 Controller Upgrade Options 175 100 User System Add Voice Mail Ports 176 100 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 177 100 User System Add 32 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 178 250 User System Add Voice Mail Ports 179 250 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 180 250 User System Add 32 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 181 250 User System Add 64 Compression Channels 183 250 User System Add 64 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 185 250 User to 700 User System No Compression Channels 186 250 User to 700 User System 32 Compression Channels 188 250 User to 700 User System 64 Compression Channels 189 700 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 190 700 User System Add
8. 133 Install the 3300 2 133 Connections 2332 nsi yma I es e EE Re ed eius 134 Installithe 3300 BRLNSU S u see caus tardus p a a Sua sg n aba 134 Setting Up the Maintenance 135 NSU Chaining susu eie 135 Install the 3300 Universal ASU 135 Install the 3300 ASU 136 Install the Peripheral 1 136 Overview of the Peripheral Unit Installation 136 Unpack Position and Ground the Peripheral Unit 137 Peripheral Unit Card Layout 137 Connect Fiber Cable to the Peripheral Unit 138 Peripheral Unit Grounding 0 139 Power 140 Release 3 3 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide vi Install Peripheral Interface Cards 141 Cable the Unit to the MDF 141 Peripheral Interface Cabling Tables 143 USOC Connector Pin Designations
9. J 42 Y O 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 17 O Y 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 43 Y G 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3 1 10T 18 G Y 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 44 Y BR 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 19 BR Y 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 45 5 12 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 20 S Y 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 46 VIBL 13T 7T 7T 4T 7T 13T P4 21 BLA 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 47 14 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 22 ON 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 48 V G 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 23 G V 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 49 VIBR 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 24 BR V 166 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R 50 SPARE J 25 SPARE J Release 3 3 151 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 152 Card Slot 7 Card Slot 7 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 26 W BL 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1 BL W 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 27 W O 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 2 OW 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 28 W G 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 3 G W 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 29 W BR 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 4 BR W 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 30 W S 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P5 5 S W 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 31 R BL 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 6 BL R 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 32 R O 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 7 O R 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 33 R G 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 8 G R 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 26 W BL 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 1 BL W 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 27 W O 10T 5MWB
10. T1 1 T2 2 T3 3 T4 4 T5 5 T6 6 T7 7 T8 8 T9 9 T10 10 T11 11 T12 12 T13 13 T14 14 T15 15 R1 26 R2 27 R3 28 R4 29 R5 30 R6 31 R7 32 R8 33 R9 34 R10 35 R11 36 R12 37 R13 38 R14 39 R15 40 Release 3 3 63 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3300 Analog Services Units Mitel Networks 3300 Universal ASU Components Front Panel 16 ONS LEDs showing circuit status ALS trunk LEDs showing circuit status 1CIM Status LED RJ 45 connector CIM connection to the 3300 Controller 1200 Univertal ASU Rear Panel D type 25 pair connector providing connectivity to the LS and ONS Tip Ring or A B circuits 8 pin modular jack RJ 45 for 2 Paging ports 8 pin modular jack RJ 45 for 4 Music on Hold ports only one MOH port is supported through software on the system Standard Male IEC 320 AC power connector OI00000000000000000000000000000000000000 90090905000055000000 000905520000 QOOOQQ 2229092725 e 955250 205952020 1 a s 5 500 59509 66606 600606 5559559 25 PAIR PAGING MOH IEC320 POWER 0208 AMPHENOL RJ45 RJ45 CONNECTOR Mitel Networks 3300 ASU Components Front Panel 24 ONS Circuit LEDs indicate the status of the telephone circuits 1 CIM circuit LED indicates the status of the CIM link RJ 45 connector CIM connection to the 3300 Controller 64 Release 3 3 Specifications Rear Panel
11. Equipment Power Requirements AC Cabinet 120 Vac 6 amps 240 Vac The input power is converted to 5 12 27 and 48 Vdc and 80 Vac ringing voltage by the power converter AC The AC power enters the DSU node at the Power Supply Unit PSU power input on the backplane The PSU converts the power to DC voltages and delivers it to the DSU backplane Release 3 3 Specifications Digital Service Unit Cards CEPT Formatter Card The system supports MSDN DPNSS DASS II UK only and Italian CAS Italy only protocols The system connects to CEPT links by using a CEPT Formatter card that has two 30 channels links Conference Card With the Conference the maximum number of conferees per sys tem is 64 and the maximum number of conferences per system is 21 Without the Conference card the maximum number of conferees per system is 24 at one time and the maximum number of three party conferences per system is 8 051 Formatter Card The system supports CO DID E amp M MSDN DPNSS and MSAN AP NSS protocols The system connects to DS1 links by using a DS1 Formatter card that has two 24 channel links Fiber Interface Module The FIM with 16 circuits provides for the interface with the 3300 ICP Controller BRI Card The BRI card supports Euro ISDN 2B D Basic Rate or North American National ISDN 1 and ISDN 2 protocols There is a 6 circuit BRI card and a 15 circuit BRI card PRI Card
12. PRI card supports DMS 100 DMS 250 Bellcore National ISDN 4ESS NI 2 SESS NI 2 Q SIG and Euro ISDN CTR4 protocols The E1 PRI has two 30 channel links the T1 has two 24 channel links R2CardThe R2 card is a protocol converter converting incoming MF R2 signals from the PSTN to DPNSS and outgoing DPNSS to MF R2 signals for the PSTN CEPT Formatter Card The CEPT Formatter card is a microprocessor controlled card which provides DASS and DPNSS digital trunk interfacing Each interface controls a 32 channel serial link Two of the channels are dedicated to signaling and synchronization The remaining 30 channels traffic channels transmit PCM voice or data samples In a DPNSS network the connection from the PBX line terminating equipment and either the BT terminating point or another PBX line terminating equipment must be made with RG59B U coaxial cable of characteristic impedance 75W The maximum cable length is 700ft Each traffic channel is considered a trunk and is assigned a trunk number Trunk numbers allow the channels to be placed in trunk groups and accessed by the system s Automatic Route Selection feature In the Trunk Service Assignment form you can assign an incoming traffic channel to a dedicated answer point for non dial in trunk applications or provide digit modification for direct in dial trunk applications CEPT Formatter Card Specification Card Type DSU Channels Provided 60 two 30 channel links Feat
13. Pair Pin Color Code BRI Port 1 26 W BL OT 1 BL W OR 2 27 W OR 1T 2 OR W 1R 3 28 W GR 2T 3 GR W 2R 4 29 W BR 3T 4 BR W 3R 5 30 W SL 4T 5 SL W 4R 6 31 R BL 5T 6 BL R 5R BRI Cable Pinout for 15 port Card Pair Pin Color Code BRI Port 1 26 W BL OT 1 BL W OR 2 27 W OR 1T 2 OR W 1R 3 28 W GR 2T 3 GR W 2R 4 29 W BR 3T 4 BR W 3R 5 30 W SL 4T 5 SL W 4R 6 31 R BL 5T 6 BL R 5R 7 32 R OR 6T 7 OR R 6R 8 33 R GR 7T 8 GR R 7R 9 34 R BR 8T 9 BR R 8R 10 35 R SL 9T 10 SL R 9R 11 36 BK BL 10T 11 BL BK 10R 12 37 BK OR 11T 12 OR BK 11R Release 3 3 95 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 96 Pair Pin Color Code BRI Port 13 38 BK GR 12T 13 GR BK 12R 14 39 BK BR 13T 14 BR BK 13R 15 40 BK SL 14T 15 SL BK 14R Primary Rate Interface PRI Card ISDN PRI in North America supplies 23 B channels bearer channels plus one D channel data channel PRI in Europe supplies 30 B channels plus one D channel Each channel is capable of transmitting voice or data calls at 64 Kbps PRI is commonly referred to as 23B D or 30B D Each PRI card has two links either T1 for the Dual Port T1 Universal T1 card in North America or E1 for the Dual Port E1 Universal E1 card in Europe The card occupies one DSU card slot and allows another DSU card including another PRI card to be installed in the slot beside it on the same FIM The PRI card is hot swappable The PRI card is configured with Network side ter
14. WARNING Electrocution Hazard Before connecting power to the 3300 In Line Power Unit please refer to the Safety Instructions Release 3 3 Installing Rack Mounting To rack mount the 3300 In Line Power Unit 1 Place the 3300 In Line Power Unit right side up on a hard flat surface with the front facing towards you 2 Locate a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the 3300 In Line Power Unit 3 Insertthe three screws and tighten with a suitable screwdriver Note You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the unit by using incorrect screws invalidates your warranty 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other side of the 3300 In Line Power Unit Insert the 3300 In Line Power Unit into the 19 inch rack and secure it to the rack with suitable screws not provided Ensure that ventilation holes are not obstructed Shelf Mounting When shelf mounting the 3300 In Line Power Unit the self adhesive rubber feet provided in the kit should be placed on the underside of the 3300 In Line Power Unit Be sure to place the rubber feet on the provided 90 angle marking in order to assure stable placement Do not place more than four 3300 In Line Power Units on top of one another if the units are shelf mounted Powering Up CAUTION The 3300 In Line Power Unit has no ON OFF switch To connector disconnect power to the Unit simply insert or remove the power cable from the AC p
15. Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 operating system I E browser 5 5 or later with 128 bit encryption FTP server running installed with IIS or PWS with a minimum of 250 MB free hard drive space Ethernet card and a connection to the Mitel Networks 3300 ICP RJ45 Ethernet cable Communications program such as VT100 or HyperTerminal Serial connection to the 3300 ICP maintenance port Java Plug in 1 3 0 Note Windows 95 98 with PWS does NOT include an FTP server application and will not work for the upgrade process unless a third party FTP server application is used You also need Q The IP address of the 3300 ICP The customer s 3300 ICP username and password The 3300 ICP software CD Your 3300 ICP Mitel Options Password Tip You can change the following four fields in the License and Option Selection form without a Mitel Options Password Note that included in these fields is a new option for Extended Agent Group Country e Networking Option Mitai Tapi Computer Integration Extended Agent Group Timer The complete upgrade install procedure takes approximately 2 hours and 20 minutes for an average sized database 50 100 MB and up to 8 hours for a large database 600 MB Release 3 3 197 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 198 Upgrade Procedure Overview The software upgrade procedure consists of the following nine sub procedures all of which must be completed in order Q FWD gt Ste
16. 64 or 128 channel echo canceller 250 User and 700 User 3300 Controller 128 Ethernet to Time Division Multiplex E2T channels 300 MHz Note This is the maximum number of channels available in the 700 User Controller 44 Release 3 3 Specifications Power fail protected real time clock Digital Signal Processor DSP provides for tone and conference functions Two cooling fans Configurations There are several configuration options for the 3300 ICP 250 and 700 Controller 250 user system without compression 250 user system with 30 voice mail ports 250 user system with 32 compression channels 250 user system with 32 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports 250 user system with 64 compression channels 250 user system with 64 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports 700 user system without compression 700 user system with 32 compression channels 700 user system with 64 compression channels The following top view diagram shows the MMC A slot numbering convention The diagram also indicates the type of MMC module that will be used in a particular slot Slots 1 through 4 allow connectors to protrude through the front panel 3300 ICP MMC SLOT NUMBERING CONVENTION Rear Panel Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 For Telecom For Telecom For Telecom For Echo DSP DSP DSP or Canceller Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 For For Compression Compression DSP Front Panel IP041
17. Latin America Tone Plan Tone Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 Continuous Busy 480 620 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Camp on 440 0 1 on 0 05 off repeat x 2 Conference 440 1 on off Confirmation 350 440 Continuous Dial 350 440 Continuous Feature Active Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Interrupted Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Message Notification 350 440 0 1 on 01 off x 4 0 2 on 0 2 off x 2 0 1 on 0 1 off x 4 then continuous Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 440 0 8 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 480 620 0 25 on 0 25 off repeat Ringback 440 480 1 on 3 off repeat Special Busy 480 620 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Special Ringback 440 480 0 5 on 0 5 off 0 5 on 2 5 off repeat Transfer Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Busy 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Camp on 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Conference 19 19 19 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Confirmation 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Feature Active Dial 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Interrupted Dial 23 23
18. The transmission characteristics for the United Kingdom variants comply with ETSI ES 202 020 Harmonized Pan European North American loss and level plan for voice gateways to IP based networks Mitel Networks digital telephones meet the requirements of ANSI TIA EIA 810 A Transmission Requirements for Narrowband Voice over IP and Voice over PCM Digital Wireline Telephones Loss and Level Matrices Requirements Specifications Each country has stipulated requirements concerning acceptable transmission performance for telephone systems The loss plan matrices provide the correct electrical losses in decibels dB for each connection to meet the specified requirement Loss plans have a direct effect on the acoustic levels provided at the set Part of meeting the requirements is to identify the reference set requirements for all standard and proprietary sets to be used in each country It is generally desirable to achieve the same relative loudness levels for all standard and proprietary telephones for a specified loss plan taking into account loop lengths transmission format analog or digital different transducers in use line trunk impedances and terminating impedances Release 3 3 11 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Loss and Level Requirements Specifications Country Requirement Document Australia ACIF S002 S003 Canada CS03 T520 T512 France TBR21 ST13 Germany TBR21 Italy TBR21 Netherlands
19. 0474 Install DSP Modules CAUTION To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet being serviced and immediately place any item removed from a cabinet into an anti static bag CAUTION Do not drop screws or lock washers in the controller To install the DSP Module 1 Remove the cover from the 3300 ICP Controller 2 Remove the DSP Module from the packaging and ensure that it is complete 3 Line up the connectors module and firmly seat onto the board Note Refer to the configurations for placement of the DSP 4 Secure the module onto the board using the screws and lock washers provided 5 Replace the 3300 ICP cover Configure the Controller Note Before you begin you should review the LAN and WAN guidelines and plan the network Complete the Installation Planner You will need to know the IP addresses reserved by the customer for the 3300 ICP Controller one for the RTC and one for the E2T for the 250 user 700 user controllers one for the 100 user controller and for the IP Phones Q Tip The initial power up and the reset in this procedure will each take 15 to 20 minutes Release 3 3 123 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 124 To complete the installation of the Mitel Networks 3300 ICP 1 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Connect power to the 3300 Controller The controller will come up in 15 to 20 minutes with factory in
20. 182 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 250 User System With 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression IPD478 Note Some controllers in release 3 0 had the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 250 User System Add 64 Compression Channels 250usersystem Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add supportfor 64 compression channels requires a new Release 3 2 chassis Note Retain your System ID Module and Hard Drive The 250 user 64 compression channel upgrade package includes One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Add the following modules Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 compression channels Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides e Four DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users Eight DSP devices 21161 for 64 channels of compression Release 3 3 183 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 184 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units
21. 700 USER SYSTEM WITHOUT COMPRESSION Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 128 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller IP 0415 52 Release 3 3 Specifications 700 User System with 32 Compression Channels This system uses One 300 MHz RTC 300 MHz E2T One 128 Channel Echo Canceller Two Dual FIMs Two DSP Modules 21061 21161 for telecom support DSP Module 21161 for 32 channels of compression This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions Four DSP devices for 64 channels of compression e 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 700 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 128 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression 0413 Release 3 3 53 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 700 User System with 64 Compression Channels This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 128 Channel Echo Canceller Two Dual FIMs Two DSP Modules 21061 21161 for telecom support Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 channels of compression This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions Eight DSP devices for 64 channels of compression 128 channels
22. ACOs ATT 4 iACO 7 4 6 t 6 6 2 iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO t 1 2 t 11 11 11 11 iONS ONS gt gt gt gt gt iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT Brazil Loss Plan Matrix iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO t T 7 T iACOs ACO ACOs ATT iACO t t 6 7 7 T iONS ONS T gt gt gt gt gt iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT 13 Release 3 3 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide France Loss Plan Matrix iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS iACO iACOs ACOs t t 1 T T t t t t t 2 T ons gt 19 15 12 12 5 5 4 2 5 2 5 5 ONS x 15 15 12 10 3 3 3 1 4 1 4 4 iops gt 12 12 9 9 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 OPS 12 12 9 7 0 0 0 2 1 2 1 1 DGS E 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 4 wan gt 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 4 DCO 11 11 8 7 0 0 0 2 2 4 iACO gt 1 1 2 2 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 2 gt 4 4 1 1 3 3 4 S NUES 2 1 ACO 1 1 2 2 6 6 6 6 4 6 4 2 ACOs 5 2 2 1 1 5 5 5 5 3 5 3 1 ATT Es 4 4 1 1 3 3 3 2 1 2 1
23. Connect power to the NSU Note The Ethernet port is used for FTP upgrades Note The cable for the CIM ports must be an Ethernet crossover cable Release 3 3 129 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 130 Install for PRI Q SIG To install and configure the 3300 Universal NSU as a PRI QSIG variant Install a Direct Connection Device Driver on a computer Create a Dial up Network connection on your computer Connect the computer to the 3300 Universal NSU Use the IMAT Tool to complete required PRI configuration Connect the 3300 Universal NSU to the ISDN network 225 ON Connecting a Laptop Computer to the NSU To connect a computer to the NSU 1 Install IMAT From the 3300 Software CD ROM run Tools IMAT Disk1 setup exe 2 Use a straight through serial cable for a direct connection 3 Use a null modem adapter if connecting to the card through a modem 4 If you have not already done so on the laptop computer install a Direct Connect modem type You may also wish to install a modem for remote connection 5 Onthe laptop create a new Dial up Networking entry Create a Modem Connection 1 Install the modem following the manufacturer s installation instructions 2 In the Modem Properties Advanced Settings window Turn off error control Turn on flow control and select Hardware Install Direct Connect Device Driver By default Windows does not support a direct cable connection You must add a device driver W
24. Dial up Networking Connection for Windows 95 or Windows 98 Dial up Network connection for Windows 2000 Professional Dial up Connection for Windows 95 or Windows 98 To create a dial up networking connection for Windows 95 or Windows 98 1 On the Start menu point to Programs point to Accessories and then click Dial Up Connections Double click Make New Connection Enter an appropriate name for the connection for example Direct for direct connections Remote or a customer s name for remote connections and click Next Note If you are creating a direct connection make sure NT Direct Connection is listed in the drop down list in the Make a New Connection window Enteran Area Code and Telephone Numberand selecta Country Code fromthe drop down list Click Next Note Even though it is not needed for a direct connection Windows requires that you enter this information 5 Click Finish Right click your new connection icon and click Properties 7 Click Configure then make sure the fields are set as follows Data bits 8 Parity none For a direct connection Maximum speed 38400 Check only connect at this speed Select wait for dial tone before dialing Select cancel the call time at 60 sec Click Advanced and turn off error control and flow control For a remote connection Stop bits 1 Click Advanced and turn on error control and select Compress data Turn on flow control and select Hardware 8 Click
25. J2 LI LINE 8 1 6 M BATTERY FEED SIPS 8 Q ER CIRCUIT RING RELAYS 8 MESSAGE WAITING MESSAGE WAITING LINE CIRCUIT SWITCHES 9 88 BB0118 RELAYS 8 MODULES 8 DSU Node Troubleshoot Fiber Interface Module FIBER INTERFACE MODULE FIM FIBER TYPE MULTIMODE M OR SINGLE MODE AND 49 OPTICAL WAVELENGTH LOCAL FIMSTATUS LED 3 E Onn TRANSMIT CONNECTOR LIES C c 5 LL REMOTE FIM E mi STATUS LED 5 RECEIVE CONNECTOR see HB cv L BB 382 There are two LEDs on each FIM The top LED indicates the status of the FIM itself the bottom LED indicates the status of the other FIM the FIM connected to the far end of the fiber optic cable 252 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Fiber Interface Module LEDs FIM LED State Meaning On In frame synchronization Off Power off or held in reset Outof synchronization see Notes below OR Tx or RX cables could be reversed Flashing Notes 1 The FIM in the 3300 ICP monitors the synchronization of the clock that appears on the fiber link coming from the FIM in the peripheral or DSU Cabinet 2 The FIM in the peripheral or DSU cabinet monitors the synchronization of the clock that appears on the fiber link from the main control cabinet FIM This synchronization state is encoded along with other information and sent back to the main control cabinet Trouble
26. Release 3 3 Specifications Mitel Networks 3300 R2 NSU Components Front panel e RS 232 serial port DB9 connector to a PC for maintenance purposes such as field installation database upgrade access to logs and modem connection for remote access Ethernet port RJ 45 connector for future use e Faceplate LEDs Miscellaneous Link Status and Message Link Controlled FIM port for fiber connection to the 3300 Controller Two CIM ports Reset pin 3300 2 NSU IP0181 Rear panel DIP switch up 1 position for FIM connection down 2 for CIM connection Two E1 ports RJ 45 connectors for network connection Two hybrid port status LEDs Two hybrid port DIP switch complexes Power connector Protective ground to ground the chassis IP0214 3300 R2 NSU Protocols R2 is a protocol converter that allows the 3300 R2 NSU to access an R2 National Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN using MF R2 digital trunk signaling The 3300 Controller also receives and processes Calling Line Identification CLI and allows the information to be displayed on the user s telephone display screen The 3300 R2 NSU supports the CCITT Blue Book Volume VI Fascicle VI 4 Specifications of Signaling System R2 Recommendations Q 440 to Q 490 with the exception of Echo Suppression Q 479 Test Calls Q 490 and international signals The 3300 R2 NSU converts the following Incoming MF R2 signal
27. 160 DSU Gard Layout x ha ee kai eked pea pem bevels AGE NOR es 161 Connect Fiber Cable tothe DSU 161 Install DSU Cards sine are daw he ne ee ERE ee a ewe quem DR 162 Interface Assembly 2 162 DS1 Interface Assembly and Cabling 163 CEPT Interface Assembly and Cabling 163 Install Wireless Devices 164 Install Symbol NetVision MINET Phone Administrator Tool 164 Install 3300 ICP as a Stand alone IP Gateway 165 Install 3300 ICP as a Stand alone Voice Mail 166 Install the 3300 In Line Power Unit 166 Rack Mo rtitirig free acea trap amas aei a AR ky aya 167 Sher Mounting aos pu extr pod OR UR UR h 167 Powering Up Loss be US e ERRORS oe eR spe TUE AE AE TUS 167 Connecting Cables to the In Line Power Unit 168 Connecting Cables to End Devices 168 Install the 3300 In Line Power Adapter 169 Install 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant 169 Install 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant
28. 38 Configurations set Rat iom et RR IRA eee ees 39 100 User System without Compression 40 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels 41 100 User System with 30 Voice Mail 42 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports 43 93300 Controller 2 miu tae AER rede a e eA e d ose a E 44 250 700 Controller l as oda 44 Mitel Networks 3300 250 and 700 Controller Components 44 Configuratioris rare pee de ae git hee Alas RI e P td que RAD E 45 250 User System without Compression 46 250 User System with 30 Voice Mail 47 250 User System with 32 Compression Channels 48 250 User System with 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports 49 250 User System with 64 Compression Channels 50 250 User System with 64 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports 51 700 User System without Compression 52 700 User System with 32 Compression Channels 53 700 User System with 64 Compression Channels 54 Mitel Networks 3300 Controller Dimensions 55 3300 Cont
29. Installing Card Slot 12 Card Slot 12 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 42 Y O 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 17 O Y 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 43 Y G 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 18 G Y 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 44 Y BR 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 19 BR Y 3 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 45 Y S 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 20 S Y 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 46 V BL 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P7 21 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 47 6 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 22 O V 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 48 V G 4T 4T 2b 4T TT 23 GN 7R 4R 4R 28G 4R 49 VIBR 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 24 BR V 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 50 SPARE 25 ee SPARE 42 Y O 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 17 O Y 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 43 Y G 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 18 G Y 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 44 Y BR 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 19 BR Y 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 45 5 12 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 20 S Y 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 46 VIBL 13T 4T 13 P8 21 BLA 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 47 14 7MWB 7T MR 4T1 14T 22 ON 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 48 V G 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 23 G V 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 49 VIBR 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 24 BR V 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R 50 SPARE 25 SPARE 1 Releas
30. Release 3 3 161 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide connector into position by pushing the metal collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector Install DSU Cards To install the DSU cards CAUTION To prevent static damage to electrical components ensure that the system is grounded before you install the cards Whenever you handle circuit cards wear an anti static strap Ensure that the FIMs are installed and cabled 2 Connect the power cord to the external ac power source Install the DSU cards Refer to Install Upgrades and FRUs for circuit card installation procedures Interface Assembly The Interface Assembly attaches to the following cards e PRI card DS1 T1 Formatter cards CEPT Formatter II cards R2 card To install the Interface Assembly 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the Interface Assembly and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged 3 Atthe rear of the cabinet locate the slot in the DSU cabinet that corresponds to the slot that you will use for the PRI R2 CEPT or DS1 T1 Formatter card 4 Remove the blanking plate from the selected slot Using the screws which secured the blanking plate mount the Interface Assembly exten sion bracket on the selected slot The closed side of the extension bracket must be to the left when viewed from the rear of the cabinet 6 Insertthe Interface Assembly Ensure the edge connector on the card aligns with the
31. There are several methods of configuring the IP Phone TFTP Server 1 The Release 3 1 IP Phone TFTP Server may reference any Release 3 2 TFTP server 2 The Release 3 1 IP Phone TFTP Server may reference a centralized TFTP Server that contains the Release 3 2 set firmware load 3 The Release 3 1 system can have the Release 3 2 set firmware loads manually loaded in the IP Phone TFTP Server directory from a Release 3 2 system WARNING Failure to correctly configure the 128 IP Phone TFTP Server in a mixed Release 3 2 and Release 3 1 network topology may cause the IP sets to become non functional Release 3 3 171 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 172 Release 3 3 Chapter 4 Install Upgrades and FRUs 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 174 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Install Upgrades and FRUs Hardware Controller Upgrade Options There are several upgrade options for the 3300 ICP Controller 100 user system upgrade to support 30 voice mail ports 32 compression channels 32 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports 250 user system upgrade to support 30 voice mail ports 32 compression channels 32 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports 64 compression channels 64 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports 250 user to 700 user system No compression channels 32 compression channels 64 compression channels 700 user system upgrade to
32. gt gt gt iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT 17 Release 3 3 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Portugal Loss Plan Matrix t 4 d 4 7 6 iACOs ACOs ATT t iACO t 7 t 6 T 6 6 12 10 t 12 iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO T 10 4 15 13 12 10 10 10 10 iONS ONS 2 15 13 12 10 10 10 10 gt gt gt gt gt iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT Spain Loss Plan Matrix T 4 7 4 T 6 iACOs ACO ACOs ATT T iACO il 7 f 6 t 6 6 t 12 10 iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO t t 12 10 15 13 12 10 10 10 10 iONS ONS t 15 13 12 10 10 10 10 gt gt gt gt gt iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT Release 3 3 18 Specifications United Kingdom Loss Plan Matrix 5 ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs t T T T 7 t t t t T T T iONS 11 11 11 11 5
33. Enable Options and manually reboot the system Change the System name in the System Options Assignment to match that of the system being migrated Setthe IP Address Host Name FTP Username and FTP password to match the Configuration Tool PC in the Controller Registry Configuration form Program 3300 ICP connectivity using Network Element Editor from the Configuration Tool with the Variant as 3300 ICP Perform a Restore of the SX 2000 converted database onto the 3300 ICP An automatic validation operation occurs to determine if the restore can proceed Reboot the 3300 ICP Check the logs for any data restore failures see Note below Change the 3300 ICP system name through the System Administration Tool Note After the Restore and Reboot check the log file In the System Administration Tool click Maintenance and Diagnostics select Maintenance Commands and click All Type the following text in the Command line type dr logfile_1 and click Submit Upgrade SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP Software Only one 3300 ICP can be configured at a time and only one SX 2000 can be migrated to a 3300 ICP ata time Migration and Configuration cannot be performed in a single task or session using the 3300 Configuration Tool After migration configuration must be completed using the System Administration Tool Data restoration automatically triggers data migration The MICRO LIGHT appears as 2 pair of NSUs and a Peripheral Unit to the 3300
34. Flashing Outof synchronization see Notes below OR Tx or RX cables could be reversed Notes 1 The FIM in the 3300 ICP monitors the synchronization of the clock that appears on the fiber link coming from the FIM in the peripheral or DSU Cabinet 2 The FIM in the peripheral or DSU cabinet monitors the synchronization of the clock that appears on the fiber link from the main control cabinet FIM This synchronization state is encoded along with other information and sent back to the main control cabinet 246 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshoot the DID Loop Tie Trunk Card INCOMING REGISTER SEIZE TER INCOMING OUT GOING NETWORK 4 RELAY 4 SELECT RELAY 4 TEST LOOPFEED FEED REVERSAL BATTERY GROUND RELAYS SIP 4 RELAY 4 PULSING RELAY 4 Lt M m D H CONNECTOR L trunk TRUNK r gt MODULE MODULE i 2 1 8 INDICATORS Ly LT 1 RUNK CONNECTOR BUSY IDLE I J2 LED INDICATORS 4 3 B TEST RFI AYS BB 123 Troubleshoot the DNI Line Card DIGITAL DNLINE UNCOMMITTED HDLC NETWORK INTERFACE LOGIC ARRAY PROTOCOLLER PROCESSOR INTERFACE CIRCUITRY 16 ULA CHIPS STATUS LED INDICATORS RED LINE STATUS INDICATOR LEDs 16 RAN120 Release 3 3 247 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Troubleshoot the DTMF Receiver Card DTMF RECEIVERS 8 OF 16 LATCH CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC CODEC CO DEC CODECY FILTER FILTER FI
35. Port LEDs One bicolor LED green and orange per port provides port status Green indicates that the terminal unit has been identified as Power over LAN Enabled and is active and receiving power Orange or blinking indicates a fault or other condition See User Guide for more information AC POWER RECEPTACLE SUPPLY pars w INFORMATION LABEL SUPPLY DATA LABEL 120479 106 Release 3 3 Specifications AC Power Receptacle The 3300 PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit automatically adjusts its power setting to any supply voltage in the range 100 240Vac PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 1 75 in 4 4 cm 1 U Width 17 0 in 43 2 cm 19 0 in 48 3 cm with 19 rack mount brackets Depth 11 9 in 30 2 cm Weight 8 8 Ib 4 0 kg PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit Environment Storage and Operating Environment Mode Temperature Humidity Operating 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F 10 to 90 no condensing Storage 20 to 70 C 4 to 158 F 10 to 90 no condensing PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit Power The PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit is designed to power devices that are Power over LAN Enabled and are IEEE 802 3af compliant Devices that are not compliant may require an external power adapter to be powered Power Supply PD PH 6024 AC 48 Input Voltage 90 to 264 VAC 47 63 Hz Input Current 90 264 VAC 412 Amps
36. Send calling party category Change to Group C signals TA_SND_TARIF_ZONE_NO Send tariff zone number TA_SND_CHINA_KA Send KA Start collecting the calling party address China Release 3 3 101 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Event Group B Event Token Description TB_SPARE Spare token TB_SND_SPECIAL_INFO Send the special information tone TB SUBS LINE BUSY Indicates that the subscriber line is busy TB CONGEST Indicates that congestion is encountered after the change from Group A to Group B TB UNALLOC NO Indicates an unallocated number TB SUBS LINE FREE CHRGE The subscriber line is free Charge TB SUBS LINE FREE NOCHRGE The subscriber line is free No charge TB SUBS LINE OUT SERVICE The subscriber line is out of service TB MALICIOUS CALL Indicates a malicious call TB XFERRED SUBS Indicates a transferred subscriber TB LINE FREE CHRGE XFER B The subscriber line is free Charge Transfer to Group B signals TB SUBS LINE INTERCEPTED The subscriber line is intercepted TB SUBS LINE FREE LST PRTY RLS The subscriber line is free Last party release TB VACANT NO Indicates a vacant number China Event Group B Event Token Description TC SND NXT CLG DIG Send the next calling number digit TC SND 1ST CLD DIG Send the first called number digit TC
37. 14 14 14 Paging 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Reorder 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Ringback 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Special Busy 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Special Ringback 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Transfer Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Voice Mail 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 30 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Release 3 3 Specifications Portugal Tone Plan Tone Frequency Hz Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 400 Continuous Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat Camp on 425 0 2 on 01 off 0 2 on 0 1 off Conference 425 0 2 on off Confirmation 425 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat Dial 350 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 350 425 0 7 on 0 7 off repeat Interrupted Dial 425 0 9 on 0 1 off then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Message Notification 425 0 7 on 07soff Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 425 0 2 on off Paging 425 0 2 on off Reorder 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 2 on 0 2 off repeat Special Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Tran
38. 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Interrupted Dial 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Message Notification 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Modem Answer 20 20 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 Override 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Paging 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Reorder 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Ringback 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Special Busy 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Special Ringback 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Transfer Dial 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Voice Mail 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Release 3 3 21 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide France Tone Plan Tone Cadence s ARS 2 Dial 440 Continuous Busy 440 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Camp on 520 0 2 on off Conference 400 0 6 on off Confirmation 440 Continuous Dial Tone 440 Continuous Feature Active Dial 440 0 75 on 0 75 off then continuous Interrupted Dial 440 0 75 on 0 75 off then cont
39. 4R MR 25 8R Release 3 3 Installing Card Slot 4 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Pn Code ONS EC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Plugs 26 W BL 9 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 1 BL W 9 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 27 W O 10T 5MWB 5 3 1 10 2 O W 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 28 W G 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 3 G W 11R 6R 6R 356 4R 6R 11R 29 WBR 12 6MWB 6T MR 12T 4 BR W 12R 6MWA 6R MR 35 12R 30 W S 13T 4T 7T 13T P4 5 S W 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 31 R BL 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 6 BL R 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 32 R O 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 7 O R 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 33 R G 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4 16T 8 G R 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3 149 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 150 Card Slot 5 Card Slot 5 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 34 R BR 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 9 BR R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 35 R S 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 10 S R 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 36 BK BL 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 11 BL BK 3R 2R 2R 156 2R 2R 3R 37 BK O 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 12 O BK 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 38 BK G 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P3 13 G BK 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 39 BKBR 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 14 BR BK 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 40 BK S TT 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 1
40. Release 3 3 41 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 100 User System with 30 Voice Mail Ports This system uses One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One dual FIM One DSP Module 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for upgrade to 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides 4 DSP devices for telecom functions for 100 users 4 DSP devices for additional voice mail resources 64 channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity to NSUs No Peripheral Shelves can be connected in this configuration without adding more DSP resources unless there are no ASU connections Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 30 VOICE MAIL PORTS Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Telecom Telecom 42 IP0475 Release 3 3 Specifications 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports This system uses One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One dual FIM One DSP Module 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for upgrade to 30 Voice Mail Ports One DSP Module 21161 for 32 Compression Channels This provides 4 DSP devices for telecom functions for 100 users 4 DSP devices for additional voice mail resources 4 DSP devices for 32 Compression Channels 64 channe
41. Set the power switch on the new PDU to off Connect the fan power connector at the rear of the PDU Insert the PDU and replace the outer screws on the PDU faceplate Plug the PDU internal power cord into the power converter Replace the internal power access cover plate Plug the external power cord into the PDU Power up the node Replace the front panels Release 3 3 215 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install a Cooling Fan To replace a cooling fan in a Peripheral Unit o goo Power down the node Remove the front panels Disconnect the fan assembly Remove the defective fan Insert the new fan Replace the fan assembly Replace the front panels Power up the node Install an Electronic Filter for Cooling Fan To replace an electronic filter for a cooling fan in a peripheral cabinet FON gt Power down the node Remove the front panels Remove the cards from the left side of the cabinet Identify and disconnect the plugs from the filter which is attached to the underside of the top of the cabinet Remove the screws holding the filter to the cabinet and remove the filter from the cabinet Unpack inspect and install the filter by reversing the previous steps Replace the cards Replace the front panels Power up the node Install a Fiber Interface Module FIM Remove a FIM 216 To remove a FIM from a Peripheral Unit WARNING Power must not be appli
42. dialing plan tone plan and loss amp level plan IP TDM E2T G 729 compression Optimized system performance 300 MHz E2T and RTC Symbol wireless telephones 3300 ICP as a Stand alone Wireless Gateway 3300 ICP as a Stand alone Voice Mail Range programming to simplify the addition change or deletion of repetitive or incremental values Telephone power options Personal and Corporate Directories on the 5140 IP Appliance System Hardware Profile to view information about installed hardware Controller upgrade options for capacity version and or compression ASU and Universal ASU to support the European market Release 3 3 3 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3300 ICP Release 3 1 Migration of SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP Migration of SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP Migration of 3200 ICP to 3300 ICP Peripheral Node support Digital Service Unit support e NSU Chaining 5001 IP Phone and 5005 IP Phone Security Disclaimer The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mitel Networks Corporation MITEL The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mitel or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries Mitel and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate su
43. 10 10 10 Busy 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Dial 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Camp on 11 9 10 7 6 8 8 8 8 Conference 14 12 13 10 8 11 11 11 11 Confirmation 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Feature Active Dial 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Interrupted Dial 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Message Notification 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 13 11 12 11 10 12 12 12 12 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Modem Answer 20 18 19 16 15 17 17 17 17 Override 13 11 12 9 8 10 10 10 10 Paging 17 15 16 13 12 14 14 14 14 Reorder 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Ringback 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Special Busy 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Special Ringback 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Transfer Dial 11 9 10 9 8 10 10 10 10 Voice Mail 17 15 16 13 12 14 14 14 14 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Release 3 3 29 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide North America Tone Plan Tone Cadence s ARS 2 Dial 350 440 Contin
44. 2 3 Remove the faceplate 4 Remove the Dual FIM Module from the packaging line up the connectors and firmly seat onto the board 5 Secure the module onto the board using the screws and lock washers provided Replace the cover DSP or Echo Canceller Module CAUTION To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wriststrap from the cabinet being serviced and immediately place any item removed from a cabinet into an anti static bag CAUTION Do not drop screws or lock washers in the controller Release 3 3 209 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 210 To remove an MMC Module S N gt Remove the cover Remove the screws ad lock washers from the module Pull up on the module to remove it Replace the cover To install DSP Modules FON gt Remove the cover Line up the connectors module and firmly seat onto the board Secure the module onto the board using the screws and lock washers provided Replace the cover Hard Drive CAUTION To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet being serviced and immediately place any item removed from a cabinet into an anti static bag To replace the hard drive ON DUO wo Turn off the power to the unit Disconnect all cables Place the 3300 Controller on the work area with the bottom of the unit facing up To remove the hard drive remove the 6 sma
45. 2 0 off repeat Transfer Dial 400 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Release 3 3 19 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Busy 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Dial 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Camp on 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Conference 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Confirmation 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Feature Active Dial 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Interrupted Dial 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Message Notification 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Modem Answer 24 24 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 27 27 22 25 22 22 20 24 Paging 21 21 16 19 16 16 14 18 Reorder 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Ringback 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Special Busy 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Special Ringback 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Transfer Dial 15 15 10 13 10 10 8 12 Voice Mail 21 21 16 19 12 12 14 18 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Prot
46. 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Message Notification 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Modem Answer 20 20 20 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 Override 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Paging 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Reorder 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Ringback 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Special Busy 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Page 1 of 2 26 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT Special Ringback 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Transfer Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Voice Mail 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Page 2 of 2 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Netherlands Tone Plan Tone Frequency Hz Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 Continuous Busy 425 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Camp on 425 0 5 on off Conference 425 0 1 on off Confirmation 425 Continuous Dial 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 425 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Interrupted Dial 425 0 4 on 04 off repeat forever Message Notification 425 400 425 0 75 on 075 off x 2 0 1 on 0 75 off 0 75on 0 75 off repeat Modem Answe
47. 25 pair D type connector provides access to the LS and ONS Tip Ring or A B circuits Standard Male IEC AC input connector for power requirement 25 PAIR IEC320 POWER 0209 AMPHENOL CONNECTOR 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 1 75 in 4 454 cm 1 U Width 17 75 in 45 1 cm 19 rack mountable Depth 15 5 in 39 4 cm Weight 10 61 Ib 4 81 kg 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Environment Storage Environment Condition Specification Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C Humidity 15 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Vibration 0 5 g 7 to 100 Hz any orthogonal axis 1 5 g 100 to 500 Hz any orthogonal axis Mechanical Stress One 15 3 cm 6 in drop each edge and corner adjacent to the rest face unpackaged One 76 2 cm 30 in drop each edge and corner packaged in cardboard amp foam Operational Environment Condition Specification Temperature 41 to 122 F 5 to 50 C Humidity 34 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Maximum Heat Dissipation 170 BTUs per hour fully loaded see Note Conversion factors 1 watt is equal to 3 412 BTUs per hour 1 ton of refrigeration is equal to 12 000 BTUs per hour or 3 516 Kilowatts and 3 4 Kilowatt hour is equal to 1 ton of refrigeration Release 3 3 65 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 66 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Power Power Supply In
48. 2V across Tip and Ring lt 2V across Tip and Ring Meter Pulse Detection None 50Hz longitudinal UK None EU Note The NA variant is designed according to the performance standard EIA TIA 464C The UK Variant is designed in accordance with CTR21 but has design parameters favoring towards BS6305 and BS6450 The EU variant is designed in accordance with CTR21 Music On Hold 3300 Universal ASU only Four physical ports are supported for Music on Hold MOH on the 3300 Universal ASU The MOH interface supports the following features 600 Ohm input impedance Signal level overload protection as mandated by FCC part 68 on encoded analog content Dry Tip Ring interface no battery Always active input no external control required or provided 70 Release 3 3 Specifications The four MOH tips amp rings occupy an 8 pin female modular jack located on the rear panel Note Only one port is supported through software on the system Paging 3300 Universal ASU only There are two paging ports on the 3300 Universal ASU The paging portis a transformer coupled interface with 600 ohms input impedance The port is full duplex and has a complete 2 4 wire hybrid interface The Balance impedance is set at 600 ohms Paging is accomplished by one of two methods Zone control via outpulsed DTMF digits Emulates E amp M trunks using the contact closure control The 3300 Universal ASU
49. 540 780 1980 1740 13 540 900 1980 1620 12 540 1020 1980 1500 11 540 1140 1980 1380 10 660 780 1860 1740 9 660 900 1860 1620 8 660 1020 1860 1500 7 660 1140 1860 1380 6 780 900 1740 1620 5 780 1020 1740 1500 4 780 1140 1740 1380 3 900 1020 1620 1500 2 900 1140 1620 1380 1 1020 1140 1500 1380 Administration of R2 Card Software IMAT ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool application is used to perform operation and maintenance functions on the R2 card You can use IMAT to download R2 card software for backup and upgrade purposes and to install or restore the database IMAT runs on an independent computer with a Windows 95 98 or 2000 Professional operating system and is connected to the R2 card through a serial link The IMAT computer accesses the R2 card either through a direct connection on site or remotely through a modem To install the IMAT application see the README TXT file on the R2 card software CD ROM For more information on IMAT refer to Using the ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool IMAT Software Upgrades Use IMAT to upgrade the R2 card software and to install or restore the database For more information on upgrading R2 card software refer to the IMAT online Help Details of how to perform software upgrades are given in Upgrading or Re installing R2 Software Release 3 3 103 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Telephone Power
50. 5T MR 3T1 10T 2 OW 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 28 W G 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 3 G W 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 29 W BR 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 4 BR W 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 30 W S 13T 4 13T P6 5 S W 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 31 R BL 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4T1 14T 6 BL R 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 32 R O 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 7 O R 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 33 R G 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 8 G R 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3 Installing Card Slot 8 Card Slot 8 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 34 R BR 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 9 BR R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 35 R S 2T 1MWB 1T MR 111 2T 10 S R 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 36 BK BL 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 11 BL BK 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 37 BK O 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 12 O BK 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 38 BK G 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P5 13 G BK 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 39 BK BR 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 14 BR BK 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 40 BK S 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 15 S BK 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 41 Y BL 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 16 BIY 8R 4MWA 4R MR 25 8R 34 R BR 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 9 BR R 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 35 R S 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 10 S R 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 36 BK BL 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 11 BL BK 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 37 BK O 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 12 O BK 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 38 BK G 13T 7T 4
51. Category 5 cable Install the 3300 BRI NSU 134 To install the 3300 BRI NSU 1 Configure the 3300 Controller E1 DPNSS on the 3300 Universal NSU that will be used to connect to the 3300 BRI NSU Program the BRI specific requirements for the E1 DPNSS interface Set up the maintenance PC Complete the 3300 BRI NSU programming Connect power to the NSU P o m Release 3 3 Installing Note The 3300 BRI NSU is set for 75 ohms impedance when connected to a digital trunking NSU running E1 DPNSS The 3300 Universal NSU is also set for 75 ohms impedance Note A Category 5 connection from the 3300 BRI NSU E1 port to a 3300 Universal NSU that is running E1 DPNSS E1 connections as TX and RX pairs in RJ 45 Option to ground one side of TX and or RX using DIP switch to use with coax adapter Note The 3300 BRI NSU is connected to an appropriate device such as a PSTN or ISDN device from a 25 pair Amphenol connector Setting Up the Maintenance PC To install configure and maintain the 3300 BRI NSU you must connect it to a maintenance computer The computer must be running DOS and have a communications program such as ProComm Plus installed To connect a maintenance PC to the 3300 BRI NSU 1 Using the RJ45 to 9 pin D type MMI cable connect the RS 232 port on the 3300 BRI NSU to COM port 1 or 2 on the PC 2 Set up the communications program on COM port 1 or 2 with the following parameters 9600 baud 8 dat
52. Description A Circuits are connected to OPS lines Loop extended over the Message Waiting Answer MWA Message Waiting Busy MWB pair to the called extension B Circuits are connected to ONS lines Consists of a 140 Vdc source delivered at a variable rate to the Ring lead of the called extension Rate is custom programmed to be continuously on through 80 Hz Operation Calls incoming to the OPS line card are converted from analog to digital signals by a line circuit module The call is then switched and the two parties connected All signals are passed through the 2 wire to 4 wire hybrid circuit on the line circuit module The line busy status LED is turned on lit while the call is in progress Calls outgoing on the OPS line card are converted from digital signals to analog signals by a line circuit module The main control processor oversees the connection between the two Release 3 3 85 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide parties All signals are passed through the 2 wire to 4 wire hybrid circuit on the line circuit module The line busy status LED is lit while a station is off hook When calls are terminated receipt of an on hook condition turns off the line status LED The call is disconnected from the circuit switch and the line circuit reverts to an idle condition The OPS line card also provides for Ground button signaling A ground button on a telephone extension so equipped provides a means of detecting a Ring lead with
53. Digit Blocks 4055 Digital Links 16 Group Page Groups 16 Hunt Groups 176 Members per Hunt Group 64 Independent Account Codes 11000 Locations in Tel Dir 250 Modem Groups 15 Modems per Modem Group 10 Release 3 3 Installing 3300 ICP Software Feature Capacity continued for all 3300 Controller Options Parameter Name Number MSDN DPNSS Cluster Elements 30 MSDN DPNSS Remote Directory Numbers 18500 Networked ACD Remote Agent Subgroups 32 Page Groups Zones 16 Personal Speed Call Users 500 blocks of 10 speed calls per user Pickup Groups 200 Members per Pickup Group 75 Routes 200 Route Lists 128 Speed Call Digit String avg 12 digits 1500 SUPERSET Callback Messages per System 500 System Account Codes 24 System Digit Strings 6814 System Speed Call 600 Telephone Directory Entries 19995 Trunk Groups 112 Trunks per Trunk Group 175 Trunk Service Numbers 150 Note This is a software capacity The number of dual FIMs available on the controller will limit this capacity Release 3 3 119 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install the 3300 Controller 120 To install the 3300 Controller gm oc Install the Hard Drive Install the System ID Module Install any DSP Modules Connect power to the Controller Set up a serial connection between the 3300 Configuration Tool PC and the Maintenance RS 232 port on the 3300 Cont
54. Install the new 21161 DSP Modules slot 7 Install the 64 Echo Canceller Module slot 6 Replace the cover 250 User System to 700 User System No Compression Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 Slot 5 DSP DSP 64 Channel 64 Channel for Telecom for Telecom Echo Canceller Echo Canceller IP0423 Release 3 3 187 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 188 250 User to 700 User System 32 Compression Channels 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to 700 user system with 32 channels of compression This system uses the following existing modules One RTC 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One E2T 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One Dual FIM Module One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Add the following modules One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels One Dual FIM Module One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Note A second 64 channel Echo Canceller can be added or the existing 64 channel Echo Canceller can be replaced by a 128 channel Echo Canceller If you choose to add a second Echo Canceller the controller must be operating on version 3 2 software The 3 0 3 1 software does not support two 64 echo cancellers This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions 32 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four External FIM connections e Four
55. Options 104 Telephone Power Sources Mitel IP Phones are capable of receiving power from a variety of sources These include PowerDsine 24PT In line Power Unit PD 6024 AC local48VDC power adapter that inserts power on the LAN cable spare pairs power jack from a 24VDC power adapter 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant p n 50002922 will allow Mitel IP Phones to receive power from a Cisco end span Catalyst switch or a Cisco mid span power hub Note An updated set firmware load is delivered as part of the 3300 ICP Release 3 2 software When the 5001 IP Phone and 5005 IP Phones reset during system startup the new firmware will be downloaded from the 3300 ICP to the set Note 5001 IP Phones and 5005 IP Phones delivered prior to 3300 ICP Release 3 2 may be powered through the 48VDC power adapter WARNING Sets delivered prior to Release 3 2 will NOT be equipped with the firmware download capability Special configuration is required to permit these telephones to be powered from a Cisco switch or hub through the 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant see Pre Release 3 2 IP Phones 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant The 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant is used when connecting Mitel sets on Cisco Local Area Networks LAN The dongle is used when connecting Mitel IP telephones to Cisco hubs that provide LAN power The dongle provides signaling to the Cisco hub or the Cisco Power Panel to provide power on the Ethern
56. PRC in place using the two screws provided or use the latches on the card guides 4 Ifa second PRC is required install it in the same manner in the top of slot 6 PRC TOP OF SLOT 6 FIM BOTTOM OF SLOT q Cf lt gt NOTE A SECOND PRC CARD AND FM IS ONLY REQUIRED IN DSU NODES WITH MORE THANTWO DSU CARDS 0406 Release 3 3 223 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install a Fiber Interface Module FIM Replace a FIM To replace a FIM in a DSU ak ON gt 7 8 9 Power down the node Remove the front panels Attache an anti static strap to your wrist If you need more room remove adjoining DSU cards Disconnect the fiber cables from the FIM Mark the cable connectors so they are replaced correctly on the new FIM Remove the screws or release the latches on the FIM Pull the FIM out gently from slot 1 or 6 unplugging it from the backplane Install a new FIM Slide the new FIM into the bottom slot 1 or 6 seating it firmly Fasten the screws or release the latches on the FIM Remove the plastic caps from the cable connectors on the FIM faceplate and connect the optical fiber cables to those connectors Replace the DSU cards Power up the node Replace the front panels Install a FIM To install a FIM in a DSU Node WARNING Fiber optic sources emit infrared light invisible to the human eye which can damage the retina Never look directly into a source
57. RMS Maximum Power Input at full load 270 Watts Output Power Output Power per Port Note 16 8 Watts Nominal Output Voltage per Port 44 57VDC Note Maximum power output is 200W for the 24 port hub See User Manual for power allocation details PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit Interfaces The PowerDsine 24Pt In Line Power Unit is a 24 Ethernet channel power feeding device The unit is designed for use with a 10 100 Base Tx standard Ethernet network over a standard TIA EIA 568 Category 5 6 or 6e cabling plant The DC operating power for the data terminal units is fed through the unused pairs 7 8 and 4 5 Release 3 3 107 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 108 Ethernet Interface Input Data In 24 Ports Ethernet 10 100 Base T RJ 45 female socket Output Data amp Power Out 24 Ports Ethernet RJ 45 female socket with DC voltage on pins 7 8 10 100 Base T and 48 Vdc and 4 5 Serial Port Interface Connector Type DB9 Male Serial Data Monitor port Release 3 3 Chapter 3 Installing 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 110 Release 3 3 Installing Installing Required Components To complete the system installation you will need the following items and information Suitable installation site Parts and equipment Information and services Power for the system Uninterruptible power supply recommended List of cu
58. SND GROUPB Send Group B signal Change to Group B signals TC CONGESTION Indicates congestion on the line TC SND NXT CLD DIG Send the next called number digit TC SND SAME CLD DIG Send the same called digit Change to Group A TC SPARE Spare token Physical Specifications Each R2 card has two E1 links The R2 card occupies one DSU slot The R2 card can be installed with the power on and is hot swappable The physical connections to and from the R2 card are made at the rear of the cabinet These connections include two interfaces RJ 45 or coaxial connectors for network connection an RS 232 port DB9 connector for administration and debugging an Ethernet port RJ 45 connector for in house development and troubleshooting Release 3 3 Specifications R2 Card Specifications Card type DSU with network interface assemblies Protocols supported The R2 card supports the CCITT Blue Book Volume VI Fascicle VI 4 Specifications of Signaling System R2 Recommendations Q 440 to Q 490 with the exception of Echo Suppression Q 479 Test Calls Q 490 and international signals Tone generation Low Tone High Tone 1 to 12 dBm 1 to 12 dBm Tone detection Normal Low High sensitivity 35 dBm 15 dBm 50 dBm R2 signaling Tone Backward Groups Forward Groups amp 1 frequencies in Hz A amp B 15 540 660 1980 1860 14
59. TBR21 New Zealand TNA 102 PTC 207 PTC 217 North America TIA EIA 464 C TIA EIA TSB 116 Portugal TBR21 Spain TBR21 United Kingdom BTR1050 BTR1080 BTR 1181 NCOP 86 42 and BS6450 Pt 4 Implementation In the loss plans positive values are losses and negative values are gains The losses are shown in one direction only outgoing from the specified port type the reverse path loss can be found by using a second look up e g In North America OPS to WAN is a 3dB gain and WAN to OPS is 9dB loss EZ Note Mitel Networks digital telephones meet the following ITU T recommended loudness rating Send Loudness Rating SLR 8 dB Receive Loudness Rating RLR 2 dB In interpreting loss plans refer to the following legend Port Abbreviation IP On Premise Station iONS On Premise Station ONS IP Off Premise Station iOPS Off Premise Station OPS Digital Station DGS Wide Area Network WAN Digital CO Trunk DCO IP Analog CO Trunk iACO IP Analog CO Trunk short iACOs Analog CO Trunk ACO Analog CO Trunk short ACOs Analog Tie Trunk ATT Note iONS iACO and iACOs apply to the new analog interface designs that comply with the IP connected half channel loss plan The first instances of these is on the 3300 ASU 12 Release 3 3 Specifications Australia Loss Plan Matrix 1 6 m E 7 4 iACOs
60. Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller IPD477 Release 3 3 47 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 250 User System with 32 Compression Channels This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support DSP Module 21161 for 32 channels of compression This provides Four DSP devices for telecom functions Four DSP devices for 32 channels of compression 64 channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to two Peripheral Units or up to four NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 8 Slot 5 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression IP0410 48 Release 3 3 Specifications 250 User System with 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for 32 channels of compression DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides Four DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users Four DSP devices 21161 for 32 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 channels of
61. Vdc loop start LS or 48 Vdc ground start GS The preferred interface is GS The German variant has LS function only Release 3 3 Specifications The trunk circuits on the LS GS trunk card are configured during the initial system programming process Each trunk circuit can be programmed to operate in an LS or GS mode LS or GS options can be changed at any time via the System Administration Tool When GS mode is selected incoming trunk calls are initiated by a ground on the Tip lead or by a ringing source applied to the trunk by the CO Outgoing calls are initiated by seizing an idle trunk via the DATA IN link of the trunk circuit and by placing a ground on the Ring lead When LS mode is selected incoming trunk calls are initiated by a ringing source applied to the trunk by the CO Outgoing calls are initiated by first seizing an idle trunk via the DATA IN link on an LS GS trunk card circuit and by placing a low resistance loop across the Tip and Ring leads Dictation equipment used on a trunk can indicate a busy or idle status by interconnecting a third wire lead to either the T MR or R MR termination at the 3300 ICP system The actual configuration that should be used is dependent upon the type of centralized dictation equipment used and its busy status i e whether a busy condition is indicated by a voltage or ground condition on the third wire see Dictation Access in Troubleshooting Hardware Peripheral Unit LS G
62. all ONS type requirements for North America and the United Kingdom meets Harmful Voltages requirement of POR1065 Operation The DNI line card provides full duplex digital transmission of both voice and data The DNI line card is a smart card capable of downloading information to and from peripheral devices ONS Line Card The ONS line card connects up to 16 standard telephone sets with line loop resistances usually not exceeding 400 ohms As such the ONS line card is used to connect internal telephone extensions close to the system The ONS line card installs in any Peripheral Interface card slot and is hot swappable ONS Line Card Specifications all variants Note The following variants apply to the ONS and ONS CLASS CLIP line cards Number of Circuits per Card 16 ONS circuits Loop Detector Threshold 15 mA 1 mA ONS line card 13 mA 1 mA ONS CLASS CLIP line card Trip Battery Ringing Interval 48 Vdc nominal Bridged Ringers 5 C4 or equivalent Features Provided 2 wire 4 wire conversion A D D A conversion DC loop supervision and dial pulse collection ringing and ring trip detection up to 5 telephones per circuit ground button detection self test capability automatic card identification constant current feed 82 Release 3 3 Specifications ONS Line Card Variant Specifications Note The ONS CLASS CLIP line card is available in NA and th
63. control cabinet through the FIM interface and the fiber optic cable To install the cards 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist 2 Insert the card into the slot and close the locking latches Testing the Card If the installation is successful the card will boot up To test the card 1 Inspect the LEDs on the faceplate to verify that the card is functioning See Faceplate LEDs 2 In the System Administration Tool Maintenance and Diagnostics use the STATE com mand to verify that the trunks associated with the corresponding channels are all in IDLE state Release 3 3 221 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 222 DSU PRI Card PRI Installation Overview The following section describes how to install the PRI card and PRI interface assembly You will need to program the PRI card into the 3300 ICP database to allocate links and trunks Install the PRI card in the following sequence Program the customer data in the 3300 ICP Configure the card for Line Side or Trunk Side termination Install the interface assembly e Install the PRI card Configure the IMAT database Connect the computer to the PRI card Save the IMAT database onto the PRI card Connect the PRI card to the ISDN network Install a PRI Card The PRI card is installed in any empty DSU slot The DSU cabinet supplies the power for the card and provides a message interface back to the control cabinet through the FIM interface and the fiber o
64. converter unit from the shelf Unpack and inspect the converter Unpack the converter and remove all packing materials Inspect the converter to ensure that the unit is not dented or scratched and that all fittings are secure Install a new converter Slide the replacement converter into position slots 13 15 Move the card latches to the vertical position to secure the converter Plug the internal ac power cord from the PDU into the ac power converter through the cutout in the backplane Replace the cover plate over the access cutout in the backplane and fasten in place with the screws removed in step 3 Power up the node Replace the front panels Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs PERIPHERAL NODE REAR 4 INTERNAL POWER CORE Ll zh AC POWER CORD S ACCESS COVER PLATE f Co 0 p V AANA19 Install a Power Distribution Unit PDU To replace a PDU in a Peripheral Unit 1 Power down the node Remove the front panels Remove the PDU Unplug the external power cord from the PDU Remove the PDU internal power cover plate Unplug the PDU internal power cord from the power converter Remove the outer screws on the PDU faceplate Pull the PDU out until you can access the fan power connector at the rear of the PDU Disconnect the fan power connector and remove the PDU Install a new PDU Unpack and inspect the new PDU for damage
65. dc voltage method Message waiting indication class message Status led indicator per circuit Low level diagnostics ONS Transmission Parameters ASU Transmission Parameters for NA Parameters for UK Input Impedance 600 ohms 300R 1000R 2200 Balance Impedance 600 ohms 1000R 220uF Digital Coding ITU p law MT8966 CODEC ITU A law MT8967 CODEC Transmission Parameters for LA Parameters for EU Input Impedance 600 ohms 270R 750R 150uF Balance Impedance 600 ohms 270R 750R 150uF Digital Coding ITU p law MT8966 CODEC ITU A law MT8967 CODEC ONS DC Supervision Parameters ASU DC Supervision Parameters for NA LA Parameters for UK EU Battery Feed at 25mA 1mA 30Vdc feed constant current set 30Vdc feed constant current set at 25mA 1mA Loop Resistance 600 Ohms includes set 600 Ohms includes set Loop Detect Threshold 12mA 12mA Flash Detect SW timed function from switch hook detector SW timed function from SWHK detector Ground button detect threshold hook state 13mA Tip or Ring to ground in off 13mA tip or Ring to ground in the off hook state Positive Disconnect current SW timed function that breaks loop SW timed function that breaks loop current Release 3 3 Specificat
66. described in the System Installation Overview 16 As the final step connect the 3300 Controller to the LAN Note You may use the internal or an external DHCP Server The controller is shipped with the DHCP server Enabled Use DHCP reservations against the MAC address for the E2T Internal DHCP Server default settings shipped enabled TFTP Server 066 192 168 1 2 TFTP BootFile 067 Isysro E2T8260 IP Phone TFTP Server 128 192 168 1 2 MN330 RTC IP Address 129 192 168 1 2 Mitel IP Phone DHCP Server 130 MITEL IP PHONE Range Start 192 168 1 20 End 192 168 1 24 Release 3 3 Installing Set the 3300 Controller IP Address To set the 3300 Controller IP address 1 Establish a serial connection from the 3300 Configuration Tool PC or any PC equipped with a communications program to the Maintenance Port on the 3300 Controller Launch the communication program 3 Setthe RS 232 communication parameters gt Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Connect AC power to the 3300 Controller Press the Reset button on the 3300 Controller with a small pointed object Wait for the Press any key to stop auto boot message and then press a key At VxWorks Boot type c and then press Enter Press Enter after you enter the required text For all other fields displayed in italics for information only accept the default value or leave blank
67. faulty card gt and select the COURTESY DOWN option 2 To confirm that all circuits are in the busy state enter STATE lt PLID of faulty card gt Pull the upper and lower latches outward until they are both in the horizontal release position 4 Draw the card toward you Immediately place the card in an anti static bag Release 3 3 213 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 214 Install a Circuit Card To install a DSU or Peripheral Unit circuit card CAUTION Wear an anti static wrist strap whenever you handle circuit cards 5 For cards that have switches refer to the card s hardware description for information about switch settings Check the connector pins to be certain that they are straight Slide the card into the slot Push the upper and lower latches away from you until they are vertical and the card is locked in place To return the circuits to service enter RTS lt PLID gt Install a Power Converter To replace an AC Power Converter in a Peripheral Unit Remove the front panels Power down the node Disconnect the internal AC power cord Unscrew and remove the cover plate over the internal AC power cord access on the rear of the node see the figure below Unplug the internal AC power cord from the rear of the AC power converter accessed through cutout in the backplane Remove the converter Move the card latches on the converter to the horizontal position Carefully withdraw the
68. hardware for 3300 control Replace the Main Controller in the MICRO LIGHT with a Triple FIM Card If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion may fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP By installing a triple FIM card in the SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT main cabinet you can physically connect it to the 3300 ICP by using multi mode fiber As a result you can use the existing peripheral and digital trunk cards within the main cabinet Connect any external cabinets by using FIMs 3200 ICP to 3300 ICP To upgrade 3200 ICP hardware for 3300 ICP control If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion may fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP The 3200 ICP database is converted and restored to a 3300 ICP database and any peripheral cabinets connected to the FIM ports on the 3300 Controller In addition to the DNIC telephones supported by the peripheral cabinet the 3300 ICP supports the following legacy IP telephones SUPERSET 4015IP SUPERSET 4025IP Software Software Upgrade Procedure 3 2 to 3 3 This procedure installs new software on your 3300 Controller to upgrade from 3300 ICP 3 0 3 1 or 3 2 to 3 3 software Asimilar Software Install Procedure can be used to rebuild or replace a corrupted 3 3 database For this procedure see the 3300 ICP Technician s Handbook or the System Administration Tool Help WARNING The software upgrade procedure will fo
69. hub accordingly if it works there is probably a faulty Data amp Power Out or Data In port in Networks 3300 In Line Power Unit or a bad RJ 45 connection A Power Not Active LED on one port is lit and the end device is not operating Wait for 5 sec to 10 sec while the Power Not Active LED is on and the end device is connected if it changes to Power Active there was a charged capacitor in the end device which was discharged after being plugged in Only then the end device can be detected and activated Verify that you are not using any crossover cable between the 3300 In Line Power Unit Power amp Data Out port to the end device The end device may require a Mitel Networks 3300 Phone Power adapter p n 57003121 at the set end to operate If an adapter is already in use replace it with a new adapter If this works discard the faulty adapter Try to bypass the long twisted pair cable and bring the end device close to the 3300 In Line Power Unit and connect to one of the ports using a short cable if it works there is probably a faulty connection or short on the long cable or one bad RJ 45 connection along the line Move the device into a different output port if it works there is probably a faulty port or bad RJ 45 connection Unplug the device and verify that the Power Not Active LED turns off if not there is probably a faulty port or internal short in the RJ 45 socket One of the ports is powe
70. iACOs ACO ACOs T T iACO d t 3 f 3 3 6 t iOPS OPS DGS WAN t t t iONS ONS T iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT Netherlands Loss Plan Matrix iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO t ATT t 2 5 t 2 6 2 2 6 2 iACOs ACO ACOs t 2 6 iACO T 2 7 2 T 2 6 2 t 2 6 2 2 6 2 2 t 2 t 10 10 iONS ONS T 10 10 iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT Release 3 3 16 Specifications New Zealand Loss Plan Matrix ATT t 2 6 t 6 2 2 6 iACOs ACO ACOs t t 5 iACO t 2 2 5 T 3 t 3 7 iOPS OPS DGS WAN T T 1 11 11 10 t 11 11 iONS ONS 10 iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT North America Loss Plan Matrix t T 7 iACOs ACO ACOs iACO 3 t 3 3 3 6 3 T iOPS OPS DGS WAN DCO T t t iONS ONS t gt gt
71. network devices including SUPERSET telephones and attendant consoles The DNI line card features devices that are compatible with MITEL SUPERSWITCH DIGITAL NETWORK MSDN data transmission protocols MSDN technology allows simultaneous 2 way transmission of digitized voice and data over a twisted copper pair The DNI line card supports voice data transmission at the rate of 128 kb s 64 kb s on each of two voice channels and 16 kb s on one signaling channel over a loop length of up to 1000 meters using 24 26 AWG wire 25 27 IWG DNI Line Card Specifications Number of Circuits per Card 16 DNI circuits up to 32 channels Power Consumption 17 24 watts External Loop Length Up to 1000 meters 24 or 26 AWG 25 or 27 IWG twisted pair including up to 50 meters 162 5 ft 22 AWG 23 IWG quad wire and up to 3 m modular line cord without bridge taps External Loop Resistance 300 ohms Data Error Rate Better than 1 in 10 000 000 bits in the presence of an interfering signal ringing Release 3 3 81 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Features Provided Interface for MITEL digital telephone sets and attendant consoles 2 wire 4 wire conversion full DX chip on board high level data link controller HDLC on board 32 K of on board RAM memory 16 K of on board PROM self test capability including power up diagnostics automatic card identification Compliance to Standards Meets
72. non condensing Vibration 0 5 g 5 to 100 Hz any orthogonal axis 1 5 g 100 to 500 Hz any orthogonal axis Mechanical Stress One 20 3 cm 8 inch drop each edge and corner adjacent to the rest face unpackaged Horizontal Transportation Impact Stress One shock pulse applied on each face perpendicular to the direction of motion of the transporting vehicle the shock pulse is a half sine acceleration 30 g peak 20 ms duration Operational Environment Condition Specification Temperature 32 to122 F 0 to 50 C Humidity 5 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Maximum Heat Dissipation fully loaded see Note 724 BTUs per hour Air Flow 150 cubic feet per minute at maximum output of the fans Radiated Emissions The system meets Class A limits as outlined in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J Conducted Emissions The system meets Class A limits as outlined in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J and complies with conducted emissions standards as outlined in BS800 Acoustic Emissions Maximum 50 dBA continuous 75 dB intermittent lt 10 duty cycle Static Discharge Withstands 50 discharges of each polarity through a 10 k resistor connected to a 60 pF capacitor charged to 20 kV and 20 discharges of each polarity through 500 ohm resistor connected to a 100 pF capacitor charged to 10 kV Lightning Surge 2 5 kV peak with a maximum rise time of 2 us and minimum decay time of
73. on the UK variant Loop disconnect detection Loop reversal detection Incoming ringing detection Status led indicator per circuit Low level diagnostics Power Cross protection as specified by CSA UL 950 Safety Specifications Lightning Protection as specified by FCC Part 68 CS 03 Release 3 3 69 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide LS Trunk Signaling Protocols 3300 Universal ASU LS Trunk Signaling Supported Protocols ASU Variant LS Protocol North America NA Latin America LA TIA EIA 464 B United Kingdom UK UK Subscriber Subsidiary Loop United Kingdom UK UK Loop Start Disconnect Clear United Kingdom UK CTR 21 Europe EU LS Trunk Parameters 3300 Universal ASU Trunk Functions Parameters for NA LA Parameters for UK EU Input Impedance 600 Ohms 370R 620R 310uF UK 270R 750R 150uF EU Balance Impedance 600 Ohms for short loop application 350R 1000R 21uF for long loops 370R 620R 310uF UK 270R 750R 150uF EU for all loop lengths Min operating loop current 18mA 18mA Max operating loop current 100mA 60mA Loop Current Limit None 60mA Ring detector Threshold 30Vrms 20Vrms Dummy Ringer load 10kOhms 2 2uF NA 65Ohms 2 2uF LA 10kOhms 2 2uF Reversal detector Detects CO battery polarity Detects CO battery polarity Loop detect for CO disc no battery
74. optional Mounting components Information and Services In order to complete the installation you must ensure that the Ethernet connection is available at the site of server one Ethernet connection 100 Base T is required if you are installing Mitel Networks IP telephones Release 3 3 Installing Server is assigned two valid static IP addresses one for the RTC and the other for the E2T cardfor the 250 700 User Controller The 100 User requires only one static IP address Customer data network information is available for example DNS server information Range of IP addresses from your LAN authority is available one IP address for each Mitel Networks IP telephone System fail transfer SFT extensions are identified Feature codes and numbering plans are available Central Office services are available and in the correct locations Note If the 3300 ICP is part of a cluster an IP Console telephony keyboard 4015IP or 4025IP telephone must be assigned a Static IP Address Note An IP Console 4015IP or 4025IP telephone in a clustered environment requires a specific Format Value and Scope for Options 128 and 129 Power Power wiring to the system must conform to the requirements of the local electrical code The system power is supplied from a commercial ac power supply Each unit is powered individually The system power must meet the following requirements The units may share a branch circuit that i
75. or into the end of a fiber energized by a source When working with raw fiber optic cable be careful of fiber ends or slivers that can puncture the skin and cause irritation 224 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the FIM Inspect the FIM to ensure that it is not damaged Remove the DSU node front door Pry open the two latches on the right hand side of the black cover panel on the front door and swing the cover panel off to the left Loosen the two screws under the black panel to release the front door Pullthe top corners of the front door out and lift it off the lip at the bottom front of the node Remove the DSU cards from the cabinet Insert each circuit card in a separate anti static bag Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 6 Slide the FIM into the bottom slot 1 or slot 6 until it connects with the backplane firmly Fasten the FIM in place with the two screws provided or use the latch on the card guides See FIM and PRC Installation in the DSU Node Remove the anti static strap from your wrist DSU R2 Card R2 Installation Overview The following section describes how to install the R2 card and R2 interface assembly You will need to program the R2 card into the 3300 ICP database to allocate links and trunks Install the R2 card in the following sequence Program the customer data in the 3300 ICP Configure the card for Line Side or Trunk Side termination Install the interface as
76. pair male D type Release 3 3 Specifications Protective ground to ground the chassis Power connector Note UK BRI will drive power to the BRI circuits the NA BRI will not 0215 3300 BRI NSU Protocols Fifteen interfaces are programmed for line support in the NA product and line or trunk support in the UK version The 3300 BRI NSU protocols are Euro ISDN 2B D Basic Rate Interface North American National ISDN 1 North American National ISDN 2 Mitel Networks 3300 NSU Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 1 75 in 4 454 cm 1 U Width 17 75 in 45 1 cm 19 rack mountable Depth 15 5 in 39 4 cm Weight 9 41 Ib 4 27 kg 3300 NSU Environment Storage Environment Condition Specification Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C Humidity 15 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Vibration 0 5 g 7 to 100 Hz any orthogonal axis 1 5 g 100 to 500 Hz any orthogonal axis Mechanical Stress One 15 3 cm 6 in drop each edge and corner adjacent to the rest face unpackaged One 76 2 cm 30 in drop each edge and corner packaged in cardboard amp foam Release 3 3 61 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Operational Environment Condition Specification Temperature 41 to 122 F 5 to 50 C Humidity 34 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Maximum Heat Dissipation fully loaded see Note 170
77. required for RJ 45 connector 2 Rx Ground Up Off ungrounded Not required for RJ 45 connector Note Site dependant normally Tx is grounded but that depends if the remote Rx connection is grounded Troubleshoot the 3300 Universal ASU LEDs are located on the front panel and indicate the status of the CIM circuit ONS circuits LS circuits and power Note The Music on Hold and Paging Ports do not have an LED to show status Copper Interface Module LED CIM LED State Meaning Off No Power Flashing Powered On BSP Running On Communication Link synchronized with 3300 Controller ONS Circuit LEDs The front panel has 16 LEDs representing the ONS line circuits LED State Circuit State Meaning Off Idle NA Steady On Off Hook NA Slow Flash Idle Circuit is manual busy Release 3 3 241 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Fast Flash Idle Circuit Fault Flashing in a pattern Loading software LS Trunk Circuit LEDs There are four LEDs on the front panel of the unit representing the LS trunk circuits LED State Circuit State Meaning Off Idle NA Steady On Off Hook NA Slow Flash Idle Circuit is manual busy Fast Flash Idle Circuit Fault Troubleshoot the 3300 ASU LEDs are located on the front panel and indicate the status of the CIM circuit ONS Circuits and power Copper Interface Module LED CIM L
78. the cabinet Peripheral Resource Cards The peripheral resource cards provide additional circuitry to support the distributed architecture These cards are installed in Shelf 2 slots 1 and 6 88 Release 3 3 Specifications Fiber Interface Modules FIMs The DSU cabinet holds up to two fiber interface modules FIMs Each FIM supports two DSU cards the FIM installed in Shelf 1 slot 1 supports the DSU cards in Shelf 1 slots 2 and 3 The FIM in Shelf 1 slot 6 supports the DSU cards in Shelf 1 slots 4 and 5 DSU Cards The DSU cabinet holds up to four DSU cards These are intelligent cards that provide specialized digital functions The DSU cards are installed in Shelf 1 slots 2 to 5 e DSU Backplane The backplane holds up to four DSU cards two fiber interface modules two peripheral resource cards the power supply cable and two Maintenance Terminal ports The four DSU cards are split into pairs each pair with a FIM Peripheral Resource card and maintenance port The following switches and connectors are located on the DSU backplane rear panel A power on off switch Asmallred sliding switch for selecting the input power source The switch can be set to either 115 Vac 60 Hz or 230 Vac 50 Hz A 3 conductor male receptacle to connect AC power A sliding panel for the Tx and Rx fiber optic cables Two RS 232 Maintenance Terminal ports A3inch wide x 4 inch high 7 6 cm x 10 2 cm metal box projecting fro
79. trunking will consume one compression license on each of the systems Conference ACD Silent Monitor and compression licences Conference calls require system DSP resources for E2T compression Release 3 3 Specifications The following examples assume that compression is not being used within the LAN each node is in a separate compression zone and Node A is the host of each conference call For example A three party conference is established between a TDM device and an IP device on Node A across a LAN and an IP device on Node B across a WAN Assuming that a compression license is not required for the connection within Node A LAN then one compression license is required on Node A for voice compression to the IP device on Node B Adding a conference member using an IP device located on Node B will consume a compression license on Node A Adding a conference member using a TDM device on Node B will consume a compression license on Node A and a compression license on Node B For example A three party conference is set up between an IP device on Node A an IP device on Node B and an IP device on Node C The nodes are connected over the WAN using IP trunking Two compression licenses are required on Node A for the connection to the IP device on Node B and the IP device on Node C Adding conference members located on either Node B or Node C will require an additional compression channel on Node A for each IP device
80. 0 ASU Components 64 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Dimensions 65 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Environment 65 3300 ASU and Universal ASU 66 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Pin Allocations 66 ONS Line Specifications 67 LS Tr nkSpecificatlons s gh hp Redi ate elds Gee BRE A Rag 69 Music On Hold 3300 Universal ASU 70 Paging 3300 Universal ASU only 71 System Fail Transfer 3300 Universal ASU only 71 Peripheral Node Lu ua s agak ated hada petit te bebe ed bete eee VE 72 Peripheral Unit 72 Peripheral Unit Dimensions 74 Peripheral Unit Environment 74 Peripheral Unit 75 Peripheral Unit Cards 75 SUPERSET HU B uu Nu S tine tues olde au 86 Digital Service Unit He ead op ee pe dad ao de p ale QW dean 88 Digital Service Unit Components 88 Digital Servic
81. 0 ICP Hardware User Guide Backplane Connector Arrangements B J3 JI JT Fei e D wi wl gol ee sefe popop pla siele e SPARE CONNECTORS x ru NNECTED TO CONNECTED PIC 10759 9 12 15 PIC SLOTS a 8 11 14 SPARE r soe 106 od 176 459 419 OF 461407 96 WE SIE HE BE 46 9 54 9 997 JI0 J6 J8 24 J2 Peripheral Wiring Backplane 142 Release 3 3 RAN RA BACK PLANE PIC SLOT 1 4 7 10 13 UPPER CONNECTOR PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD LOWER CONNECTOR BB0050 Installing Peripheral Interface Cabling Tables Use the tables to cable the Peripheral Unit card connectors to the main distribution frame Note When cabling the SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT node connectors use the cabling tables that correspond to the Peripheral Interface card slot in the node Cable Connectors Connectors for customer supplied 25 pair cables terminating on peripheral backplane to MDF and SFT unit to MDF use AMP Champ or equivalent cable connectors 50 pin RS receptacle screw lock female Screw lock 90 tapered slide on hood USOC Connector Pin Designations The USOC connector numbers are RJ2I X for CO Trunks RJ2EX for 2 wire E amp M Trunks RJ2FX for 4 wire E amp M Trunks e RJ2GX for 4 wire E amp M Trunks RJ2HX for 4 wire E amp M Trunks USOC Connector P
82. 00 ICP Hardware User Guide 138 PERIPHERAL CABINET SLOT LAYOUT BER INTERFACE MODLLE PERIPHERAL RESOURCE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL SWITCH CONTROLLER PERIPHERAL INTERCONNECT CARD POWER CONVERTER 5 6 RANA Connect Fiber Cable to the Peripheral Unit The fiber optic cable connects the FIM in the 3300 Controller to the FIM in the Peripheral Unit To connect the fiber optic cable to the FIM in the peripheral node Review the guidelines for handling fiber optic cable Route the fiber optic cable through the cable port at the rear of the peripheral cabinet into the cabinet Extend the fiber cable approximately 30 cm 1 ft beyond the front of the cabinet Install a short piece of nylon spiral wrap over the cable at the point where the cable exits the rear of the cabinet Close the sliding cable port door Ensure that the door closes on the nylon spiral wrapped section of fiber cable Remove the plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable and the connector ferrules on the FIM faceplate Plug the fiber connectors into the connectors on the FIM faceplate The fiber con
83. 001270 3300 Universal Network Services Unit NA 50001271 3300 Universal Network Services Unit UK 50001274 3300 BRI Network Services Unit NA 50001275 3300 BRI Network Services Unit UK 50001856 SX 2000 Triple FIM Carrier 50002046 3300 Analog Services Unit 24 Port LA 50002047 3300 Analog Services Unit 4 16 Combo LA 50001272 3300 R2 NSU 110V 50001273 3300 R2 NSU 250V 50002370 3300 Peripheral Expansion Node dark grey 120V NA 50002371 3300 Peripheral Expansion Node dark grey 240V NA 50002372 3300 Peripheral Expansion Node dark grey 120V UK 50002373 3300 Peripheral Node dark grey 120V AC NA 50002374 3300 Peripheral Node dark grey 240V AC NA 50002375 3300 Peripheral Node dark grey 120V AC UK 50002376 3300 Peripheral Node Door dark grey 50002572 3300 Peripheral Cabinet FRU 50002580 3200 to 3300 Upgrade 250 Users UK upgrade components to 3 2 50002581 3200 to 3300 Upgrade 250 Users NA upgrade components to 3 2 50002582 3340 Branch Office Solutions LA Release 3 3 227 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 228 Hardware continued Part Number Description 50002583 3340 Branch Office Solutions UK 50002584 3340 Branch Office Solutions NA 50002813 3300 Analog Services Unit 24 Port Euro 50002814 3300 Universal Analog Services Unit 4 16 Combo Euro 50002922 3300 Power Dongles Cisco compliant 10 PK 50002211 3300 Controller 100 User
84. 1 14 Release 3 3 Specifications Germany Loss Plan Matrix iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS DCO iACO iACOs ACOs ATT t li t t t t t t t t t t iONS 25 13 13 10 10 4 4 4 2 2 3 3 3 ONS EN 13 13 10 10 3 3 3 0 2 1 3 3 iOPS 10 10 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 OPS 2 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 DGS A 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 WAN E 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 DCO 25 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 0 2 1 iACO E 2 2 1 0 6 6 6 7 5 6 6 6 iACOs 4 4 1 1 6 6 6 7 5 6 6 6 ACO an 2 2 1 0 6 6 6 7 5 6 6 6 ACOs _ 4 4 1 1 6 6 6 7 5 6 4 5 ATT 8 8 5 5 2 2 2 3 1 2 0 1 Italy Loss Plan Matrix iONS ONS iOPS OPS DGS DCO iACO iACOs ACOs ATT t t t t t t t t t t t t iONS En 19 17 16 16 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 5 ONS 2s 17 13 14 12 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 7 iOPS E 16 14 13 13 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 6 OPS E 16 12 13 11 2 2 2 1 3 3 3 6 DGS 6 12 10 7 9 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 WAN E 12 10 7 9 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 DCO e 14 10 10 9 0 0 0 1 2 2 2 4 iACO 4 1 1 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 4 iACOs X 4 1 1 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 4 ACO 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 4 ACOs E 5 4 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 5 5 4 ATT Ed 10 10 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 Release 3 3 15 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Latin America Loss Plan Matrix ATT t T
85. 1 is not compatible with OPS Manager Q Tip We recommend that you avoid running multiple versions of Java Plug in If you are running the incorrect version for the upgrade you should uninstall it from every PC that is used as an administrator for the 3300 Integrated Communications Platform ICP and allow the 3 3 software to install the correct version during the next backup restore on each one Database backup During the upgrade procedure you are instructed to perform a backup of your database Note that during the first minute of ESM backup the voice mail system is inaccessible and in Ring No Answer state If users are still accessing voice mail when you start the ESM backup voice mail will remain in Ring No Answer state until all voice mail users are disconnected from the system Thus we strongly recommend that you ensure no one is accessing voice mail before you begin your ESM backup To check if voice mail is currently in use issue the stat 1 4 27 and stat 1 4 28 ESM maintenance commands Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Note We strongly recommend that you ensure the ESM backup file contains voice mail messages before running the upgrade procedure see step 16 of Backing up the database in the following upgrade procedure Note It is very important to maintain current database backups backups should be done on a regular basis Before you begin The installer s PC requires the following software and hardware
86. 10 us applied to power lead terminals and 800 V peak with a maximum rise time of 10 ms and minimum decay time of 560 ms applied to outside plant interface terminals Induction Normal 50 Vrms at 60 Hz open circuit longitudinal mode Tip and Ring to ground Release 3 3 Specifications Operational Environment continued Condition Specification Power line Faults and Line 600 Vrms between Tip and Ring or to ground Crosses Abnormal Flammability Minimum oxygen index 28 as outlined in ASTM D2863 70 and ASTM D28664 74 meets all safety specifications for product type CSA UL and BT for use in office environment Conversion factors 1 watt is equal to 3 412 BTUs per hour 1 ton of refrigeration is equal to 12 000 BTUs per hour or 3 516 Kilowatts and 3 4 Kilowatt hour is equal to 1 ton of refrigeration Peripheral Unit Power Power Supply Operation 120 Vac 230 120 Vac Maximum AC power input Watts 212 W Equipment Power Requirements AC Cabinet 120 Vac 6 amps 240 Vac The input power is converted to 5 12 27 and 48 Vdc and 80 Vac ringing voltage by the power converter AC The AC input power connects to the PDU on the back of the Peripheral Unit by an AC power cord An internal power cord extends AC power to the AC power converter and DC power to the backplane A fan power connector at the rear of the PDU provides power to the fans See Periph
87. 128 Channel Echo Canceller Two Dual FIMs Two DSP Modules 21061 21161 for telecom support And the following module One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides Eight DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 700 users Four DSP devices 21161 for 32 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four external FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 32 compression channels to a 700 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Install the DSP Module slot 3 3 Replace the cover Release 3 3 191 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 192 700 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 128 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression IP0413 Note Some controllers in release 3 0 had the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 700 User System Add 64 Compression Channels 700 User System Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add support for 64 compression channels This syste
88. 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 48 VIG 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 23 GN 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 49 V BR 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 24 BR V 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R 50 SPARE 25 qe SPARE 154 Release 3 3 Installing Card Slot 10 Card Slot 10 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 26 WI BL 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1 BL W 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 27 W O 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 2 OW 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 28 W G 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 3 G W 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 29 W BR 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 4 BR W 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 30 W S 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P7 5 S W 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 31 R BL 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 6 BL R 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 32 R O 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 7 O R 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 33 R G 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 8 G R 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 26 WI BL 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 1 BL W 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 27 W O 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 2 O W 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 28 W G 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 3 G W 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 29 W BR 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 4 BR W 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 30 W S 13T 4T TT 13T P8 5 S W 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 31 R BL 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 6 BL R 148 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 32 R O 15T 8T 8T 4E
89. 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Conference 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 Confirmation 17 13 14 12 12 16 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 19 19 18 13 19 Feature Active Dial 17 13 14 12 12 16 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 19 19 18 13 19 Interrupted Dial 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Message Notification 17 13 14 12 12 16 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 19 19 18 13 19 Modem Answer 24 20 21 19 19 22 23 22 17 23 Override 27 23 24 22 22 25 26 25 20 26 Paging 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Reorder 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Ringback 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Special Busy 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Special Ringback 17 13 14 12 12 16 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 19 19 18 13 19 Transfer Dial 17 13 14 12 12 15 16 15 10 16 20 16 17 15 15 18 19 18 13 19 Voice Mail 21 17 18 16 16 19 20 19 14 20 Note DTMF tones supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Release 3 3 25 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide
90. 18 18 19 18 Interrupted Dial 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Message Notification 9 8 6 11 5 4 5 5 6 5 14 13 11 16 10 9 10 10 11 10 Modem Answer 20 19 17 22 16 15 16 16 17 16 Override 18 17 15 20 14 13 14 14 15 14 Paging 19 18 16 21 15 14 15 15 16 15 Reorder 9 8 6 11 5 4 5 5 6 5 14 13 11 16 10 9 10 10 11 10 19 18 16 21 15 14 15 15 16 15 Ringback 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 21 18 17 18 18 19 18 Special Busy 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Special Ringback 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Page 1 of 2 34 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Output Level iACO iONS ONS 5 OPS iACO DCO Transfer Dial 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 Voice 19 18 16 21 15 14 15 15 16 15 Page 2 of 2 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as RTP p
91. 20 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country New Zealand Tone Plan Tone i d Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 400 Continuous Busy 400 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Camp on 520 0 2 on off Conference 400 0 6 on off Confirmation 1400 Continuous Dial Tone 400 Continuous Feature Active Dial 400 0 75 on 0 75 off then continuous Interrupted Dial 400 0 75 on 0 75 off then continuous Message Notification 400 520 400 0 75 on 0 75 off x 2 then 520 0 2 on 0 75 off x 1 then 400 0 75 400 on 0 75 off repeat forever Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 1400 0 3 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 400 0 075 on 0 1 off 0 075 on 0 75 off repeat Page 1 of 2 28 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Plan continued Tone Cadence s Ringback 400 450 1 on 2 off repeat Special Busy 400 0 35 on 0 35 off repeat Special Ringback 400 450 0 4 on 0 2 off 0 4 on 2 0 off repeat forever Transfer Dial 400 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Page 2 of 2 Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 11 9 10 9 8 10
92. 219 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install a BRI Card To install the BRI card 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the BRI card and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged Insert the BRI card into the slot that corresponds to the BRI interface assembly and close the locking latches To make the connections to the BRI card 1 Using a BNC to BNC cable connect the Rx port on the BRI interface assembly to the Tx port on the CEPT interface assembly 2 Using a BNC to BNC cable connect the Tx port on the BRI interface assembly to the Rx port on the CEPT interface assembly 3 Using the 44 pin D type to Amphenol cable connect the ISDN BRIportonthe BRI interface assembly to the distribution frame RJ45 patch panel or network terminating rack See tables for the cable pinout 6 circuit and 15 circuit 220 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs BNCTOBNC FOR 2 CONNECTION TO CARD BRITxTO CEPT Rx BRI CEPT Tx D TYPE TO AMPHENOL FOR CONNECTIONTOTE RJ45 TO 9 PIN D TYPE FOR BB1123 CONNECTIONTO MAINTENANCE PC Install CEPT DS1 Formatter II Card Before you begin Program the Card Assignment with CEPT Formatter or DS1 Formatter cards Install the Interface Assembly The CEPT DS1 T1 Formatter cards are installed in any empty DSU slot The DSU cabinet supplies the power for the card and provides a message interface back to the
93. 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 5 Create a Dial up Network connection on the PC Refer to Install the 3300 Universal NSU for details 6 Connect the computer to the 3300 R2 NSU 7 Use the IMAT Tool to complete the required configuration 8 Connect the 3300 R2 NSU to the PSTN network 9 Connect the 3300 R2 NSU to the 3300 Controller 10 Connect power to the NSU Connections Connect the computer to the 3300 R2 NSU To connect the computer to the 3300 R2 NSU 1 Connect the serial cable from the computer s COM port to the 3300 R2 NSU 9 pin serial port 2 Onthe File menu click Connect to Remote Site Inthe Dial Up Entry box select the name you entered for the connection when creating the dial up connection See Dial Up Networking Connection Note The 3300 R2 NSU does not require a password 4 Ensure that PRI CARD is selected under Remote ISDN System 5 Click Connect In the Connected to remote site window click OK Note A networked computer running Win95 98 has difficulties communicating using Dial up Networking It is strongly suggested that a non networked computer be used Connect the 3300 R2 NSU to the 3300 Controller A fiber connection originates from a fiber interface module FIM port on the front of the 3300 Controller and is terminated on the FIM port of the digital trunking 3300 R2 NSU The 3300 R2 NSU is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN termination point from the LO port with
94. 46 cubic feet per minute at maximum output of the fans Acoustic Emissions Maximum 50 dBA continuous 75 dB intermittent 1096 duty cycle Conversion factors 1 watt is equal to 3 412 BTUs per hour 1 ton of refrigeration is equal to 12 000 BTUs per hour or 3 516 Kilowatts and 3 4 Kilowatt hour is equal to 1 ton of refrigeration 3300 Controller Power Power Supply Input disconnect IEC 320 AC connector Operation 120 Vac 230 Vac or auto selectable Maximum input power 100 User Controller 100 W 250 700 User Controller 200 W AC source 90 264 Vac 47 63Hz Release 3 3 55 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 56 Output Power Output Voltage Max Current 3 3 1 5 30 0A 5 0V 1 8 0A Total power of 3 3V and 5 0V not to exceed 100W 12 0V 7 3 0A Hard Disk Drive 3300 Controller PCB Interfaces PCB Printed Circuit Board Interfaces Connector Function Type Quantity Signals Comments RS 232 DB9 2 Txd Rxd RTS CTS DCE pinout DTR CD DSR Gnd Female style parenthesis indicates Supports rates to 115K operational function Default setting 9600 8 dependent upon application bits No Parity 1 Stop bit Txd Rxd Gnd EIDE 40 pin male 1 Internal Hard Disk Drive Internal to box On RTC 10 100 8 pin Mod jack 4 2in 100 TxN RxN User side pinout Ethernet Contro
95. 5 5 3 6 3 6 6 ONS E 11 11 11 11 5 5 5 3 6 3 6 6 iOPS ES 8 6 6 6 0 2 2 0 1 0 1 2 OPS E 8 6 6 6 0 2 1 0 1 0 1 2 DGS 7 4 7 7 0 0 0 1 2 3 2 0 WAN e 7 7 7 7 0 0 0 1 4 4 4 4 DCO 7 7 7 7 0 0 0 1 1 4 1 4 iACO n 3 3 1 1 4 4 2 0 1 1 1 2 iACOs 2 2 1 1 1 0 3 3 1 1 1 4 ACO E 0 2 1 1 1 3 2 0 1 1 1 4 ACOs 2 2 1 1 1 0 3 3 1 1 1 4 ATT e 2 2 2 2 2 1 0 4 4 4 4 Tone Plans Tone plans permit the station user to distinguish different stages of call progress and different types of calls Each tone is assigned a level which ensures an acceptable quality Australia Tone Plan Frequency Tone Hz Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 400 425 Continuous Busy 425 0 375 on 0 375 off repeat Camp on 425 0 25 on off Conference 425 0 8 on off Confirmation 400 425 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat Dial Tone 400 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 400 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Interrupted Dial 400 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Message Notification 400 425 0 95 on 0 05 off x 2 then 0 1 on 0 1 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat forever Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 1400 0 2 on off Paging 425 0 25 on off Reorder 425 2 5 on 0 5 off repeat Ringback 400 450 0 4 on 0 2 off 0 4 on 2 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 375 on 0 375 off repeat Special Ringback 400 450 1 0 on
96. 5 S BK 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 41 Y BL 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 16 BIY 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 34 R BR 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 9 BR R 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 35 R S 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 10 S R 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 36 BKBL 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 11 BL BK 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 37 BK O 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 12 O BK 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 38 BK G 13T 4T TT 13T P4 13 G BK 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 39 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4T1 14T 14 BR BK 14R 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 40 BK S 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 15 S BK 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 41 Y BL 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 16 BL Y 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3 Installing Card Slot 6 Card Slot 6 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 42 Y O 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 17 0 Y 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 43 Y G 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 18 G Y 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 44 Y BR 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 19 BR Y 2R 2R 156 2R 2R 3R 45 Y S 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 20 S Y 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 46 V BL 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P3 21 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 47 V O 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 22 O V 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 48 V G 7T 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 23 GN 7R 4R 4R 28G 4R 49 VIBR 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 24 BR V 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 50 SPARE J ee 25 SPARE
97. 50002970 3300 Controller 250 User 50002971 3300 Controller 700 User 50003345 3300 Configuration Tool 3 3 CD ROM amp License 50003347 3300 Configuration Tool 3 3 CD ROM 50002976 Power Cord 3 Pack NA 50002977 Power Cord 3 Pack UK 50002952 Power Cord 3 Pack Euro 50002230 Power Cord 3 Pack Australia New Zealand 50002978 3300 Controller contains E2T and RTC only 50002979 3300 Quad DSP MOD II 52000810 3300 Chassis Upgrade 64 Channels Compression 700 User contains 50002971 700 User Controller 2 X DSPs 40 Compression Licenses use old SysID and Hard Drive 52000840 3300 Chassis Upgrade 64 Channels Compression 250 User contains 50002970 250 User Controller 2 X DSPs 40 Compression Licenses use old SysID and Hard Drive 9125 100 100 NA EMI Filter Kit 9125 100 106 NA Cabinet Interconnect Cable 15 Ft 9180 305 000 NA System Fail Transfer Unit 6 circuit 9189 000 400 NA SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Light Grey Back lit 9189 000 401 NA SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Dark Grey Back lit 9400 200 116 NA Peripheral Node 9400 200 117 NA Peripheral Expansion Node II AC 9400 200 118 NA Peripheral Cabinet II AC 9400 200 119 NA Peripheral Interconnect Card 9400 200 122 NA DSU Node 9400 200 125 NA DSU Cabinet AC 9400 200 144 NA Cabinet Stacking Brackets 9400 200 200 NA Power Module Redundant in Control Node 9400 200 301 NA Peripheral DSU
98. 6 Release 3 3 45 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 250 User System without Compression This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support This provides e Four DSP devices for telecom functions 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections Four ASU connections CIM ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to two Peripheral Units or up to four NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 USER SYSTEM WITHOUT COMPRESSION Slot 8 Slot 5 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Echo Canceller IP0412 46 Release 3 3 Specifications 250 User System with 30 Voice Mail Ports This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides Four DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 User System With 30 Voice Mail Ports Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel
99. 64 Compression Channels 192 SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP 194 SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 33001 195 3200 IGP t0 3300 ICP ate es a agere ras Fut AR Auge SER DR ARR 195 Software PP 195 Software Upgrade Procedure 3 2 to 3 3 195 Upgrade SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP Software 202 Upgrade SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP Software 203 Upgrade 3200 ICP to 3300 ICP Software 204 Field Replaceable Units 208 Peripheral Node FRUS rer gadis RA 213 Chapter 5 Programming Programming Sd oie APERIA EG Ra A Ru Ree eae ee eles 257 Overview of Programming 257 UseAMAT ois oui V eR Eu s mae gum eR get srt e wig gena e aed ied 257 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting TE RR Rex ERR e ux ee ee 233 HardWare 4 Eu ESL edna ia NUN M 233 Troubleshoot the 3300 Controller 233 System Hardware Profile 234 Troubleshoot the 3300 Universal NSU 234 Troubleshoot the 3300 R2 NSU 236 Trou
100. 8T 15T 7 O R 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 33 R G 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 8 G R 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3 155 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 156 Card Slot 11 Card Slot 11 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONSL OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNIL Backplane Code C LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk C Plugs 34 R BR 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 9 BR R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 35 R S 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 10 S R 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 36 BK BL 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 11 BL BK 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 37 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 12 O BK 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 38 BK G 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P7 13 G BK 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 39 BK BR 6T 3MWB 3T MR 271 6T 14 BR BK 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 40 BK S 4 4T 2E 4T 7T 15 S BK 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 41 Y BL 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2 8T 16 B Y 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 34 R BR 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 9 BR R 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 35 R S 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3 1 10T 10 S R 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 36 BK BL 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 11 BL BK 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 37 BK O 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3 12T 12 O BK 12R 6MWA 6R MR 35 12R 38 BK G 13T 7T 7T 4T 7T 13T P8 13 G BK 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 39 BK BR 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 14 BR BK 14R 7MWA 7R MR 481 14R 40 BK S 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 15 S BK 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 41 Y BL 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4 16T 16 BL Y 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3
101. ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To upgrade a 250 user system to a 700 user system with 32 channels of compression Remove the cover Install the new Dual FIM Modules slot 2 Install the new 21161 DSP Modules slot 7 and slot 4 Install the 64 Echo Canceller Module slot 6 Replace the cover gu oes o cm Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 250 User System to 700 User System 32 Compression Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 DSP DSP 64 Channel 64 Channel for Telecom for Telecom Echo Canceller Echo Canceller Slot 4 21161 DSP Compression IPO480 250 User to 700 User System 64 Compression Channels 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to 700 user system with 64 channels of compression This system uses the following existing modules e One RTC 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One E2T 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One Dual FIM Module One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Add the following modules One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 compression channels One Dual FIM Module One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Note A second 64 channel Echo Canceller can be added or the existing 64 channel Echo Canceller can be replaced by a 128 c
102. BL W 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 27 W O 10 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 2 O W 10R 5MWA 5R MR 33R1 10R 28 W G 11 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 3 G W 11 6R 6R 356 4R 6R 11R 29 W BR 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3 12T 4 BR W 12R 6MWA 6R MR 35 12R 30 W S 3T 4T 7T 13T P2 5 S W 13 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 31 R BL 14 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 6 BL R 148 7MWA 7R MR 481 14R 32 R O 15 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 7 O R 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 33 R G 16 8MWB 8T MR 4 16T 8 G R 16R 8MWA 8R MR 45 16R Card Slot 2 Card Slot 2 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Fin Code ONSLC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Plugs 34 R BR 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 9 BR R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 35 R S 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1 1 2T 10 28 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 36 BK BL 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 11 BL BK 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 37 BK O 4T 2MWB 2T MR M 4T 12 4R 2MWA 2R MR SB 4R 38 BK G 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P1 13 G BK 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 39 BK BR 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 14 BR BK 6R 3MWA 3R MR 281 6R 40 BK S 7T 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 15 S BK 7R 4R 4R 256 4R 7R 41 Y BL 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2 8T 16 B Y 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R Release 3 3 Installing Card Slot 2 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Fn Code UNS EU LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Tr
103. BTUs per hour Conversion factors 1 watt is equal to 3 412 BTUs per hour 1 ton of refrigeration is equal to 12 000 BTUs per hour or 3 516 Kilowatts and 3 4 Kilowatt hour is equal to 1 ton of refrigeration 3300 NSU Power Power Supply Input disconnect IEC 320 AC connector Operation 120 Vac 230 Vac Switch or auto selectable Maximum power output 60 W Universal and R2 40 W BRI AC source 90 132 Vac 47 63Hz in North America 180 264 Vac 47 63Hz in Europe Output Power Output Voltage Max Current 5 0V 5 8 0A BRI Note total power of 12V and 5V not to exceed 60W BRI only 12 0V 7 3 0A Line power supply 3300 NSU Pin Allocations T1 and E1 Connector Allocation Signal Name RJ 45 Connector Pin RXRING RXTIP Not used TXRING TXTIP Not used Not used Not used NI O Q BR OO N Release 3 3 Specifications RS 232 Maintenance Connector Allocation Signal Name RJ 45 Connector Pin DTR data terminal ready 1 DCD data carrier detector RXD receive data TXD transmit data DTR data terminal ready GND Not used RTS ready to send CTS clear to send o o o om BR O N Not used BRI Connector Allocation
104. ED State Meaning Off No Power Flashing Powered On BSP Running On Communication Link synchronized with 3300 Controller ONS Circuit LEDs The front panel has 24 LEDs representing the ONS line circuits LED State Circuit State Meaning Off Idle NA Steady On Off Hook NA Slow Flash Idle Circuit is manual busy Fast Flash Idle Circuit Fault Troubleshoot the 3300 In Line Power Unit LEDs Power Status Indications Note Power Active Green and Power Not Active Orange Port LED State Port Load Conditions Port Voltage Green Off Non Active load or unplugged port No DC voltage is present over the Orange Off wires 242 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Power Status Indications Green On Active load is plugged in and complies Continuous nominal DC voltage is Orange Off to normal load conditions present on the spare pairs Green Off Overload conditions or shorted Power to the port is disconnected Orange On terminal port or forced external voltage No DC voltage is present on the feed constant DC into the port spare pairs Green On Internal Hardware Fault No DC voltage is present over the Orange On wires Green Blinking Transitional mode in which Load Power is disconnected Orange Off detection is in process or discharged No DC voltage is present over the capacitor in the PDTE wires Green Off Total aggregate pow
105. Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 User System With 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression IPD478 Release 3 3 49 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 250 User System with 64 Compression Channels This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 channels of compression This provides Four DSP devices for telecom functions Eight DSP devices for 64 channels of compression 64 channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections Four ASU connections CIM ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to two Peripheral Units or up to four NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 USER SYSTEM WITH 64 COMPRESSION CHANNELS 50 Slot 8 Slot 5 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0411 Release 3 3 Specifications 250 User System with 64 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports This system uses One 300 MH
106. ICP If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion will fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP Release 3 3 203 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 204 Windows 2000 users should clear the browser cache To transfer database from SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP 1 Prepare the SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT for migration reduce Peripheral and DSU nodes to a maximum of 4 this figure is a guide only consult a Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for actual figures deprogram unsupported devices and cards AC13 AC15 SCDC DID3 Advanced Tone Detector ISDN Gateway FIM Carrier Card COV Line Card 3DN 4DN SUPERSET 3 SUPERSET 4 SUPERSET 700 SUPERSET 7DN SUPERCON SOLE 2000 and datasets enable MNMS Configuration Management 1 and MNMS Database Access options 2 Program SX 2000 connectivity using Network Element Editor from the Configuration Tool 3 Backup SX 2000 database datasave from the 3300 Configuration Tool The Configura 7 8 tion Tool will convert the SX 2000 database to a 3300 database Prepare the 3300 ICP for migration Enable Options and manually reboot the system Change the System name in the System Options Assignment to match that of the system being migrated Set the IP Address Host Name FTP Username and FTP password to match the Configuration Tool PC in the Controller Registry Configuration form Program 3300 ICP connectivity using Network Element Editor from t
107. INATION DIAL PULSE TRUNK CIRCUIT RELAYS 8 RELAYS MODULES 8 NOTE 50 Hz METERING SIP INSTALLED ON MC340AB MC340 AD AND MC 340 AE CARDS ONLY 80117 Release 3 3 249 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 250 DICTATION ACCESS a S RMR LINE mal ee EL NN ____ ___ R MR J Mg BUSY CONDITIONS RELAY CONTACTS B DICTATION ACCESS GROUND DRIVEN BUSY CONDITION TERMINATION TYPES __ A MESSAGE REGISTRATION 48 Vd GROUND RETURN PBX _ co T MR LINE M 48 Vc wR RIMR ou w EE D C MESSAGE REGISTRATION 72 Vde METALLIC RETURN Release 3 3 RAN hh Troubleshooting Troubleshoot the ONS Line Card lh s ONS 1 S iE E c ck ich pes STATUS LED CONNECTOR 177 AGL SD INDICATORS DNI LINE ON OFF CONNECT OR LED J INDICATORS 6 4 13 12 1 1d 3 T ONS LINE CIRCUI RR 3R7 Troubleshoot the ONS CLASS CLIP Card ONS CLASSICLIP LINE CARD ONS LINE CIRCUIT STATUS LED INDICATORS e o 2 B o LINE ON OFF LED gt INDICATORS ONS LINE CIRCUIT BBI202 Release 3 3 251 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Troubleshoot the OPS Line Card MESSAGE WAITING 94 53 5 5 SWITCHES 51 54 STATUS LED e INDICATORS gt TRUNK BUSY IDLE Ej LED INDICATORS 2 8
108. ITEL IP PHONE 132 VLAN ID for the voice LAN Hex 32 bit word optional 133 Priority values of 1 7 Mitel recommends 6 optional Use IMAT The IMAT software is used to program hardware and call characteristics for the NSUs that run PRI or R2 protocols IMAT is also used to install software upgrades Maintenance activities include access to the following R2 maintenance information A list of all software files and versions on the 3300 R2 NSU Log messages which contain a history of activities and the status of faults R2 database Use IMAT to backup the database from the 3300 R2 NSU or to upgrade the R2 software on the 3300 R2 NSU For more information refer to the IMAT online Help Release 3 3 233 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide To log on to an IMAT computer 1 Launch IMAT from the desktop IMAT may display a user name configuration error mes sage Ignore this message and press OK 2 From the File menu select Connect to Remote Site To exit the IMAT application 1 Save any open databases 2 On the File menu click Exit 234 Release 3 3 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 236 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Hardware Troubleshoot the 3300 Controller Note The visual indications on the FIM Alarm CIM and LAN Ethernet port LEDs are the same for the 100 and 250 700 user variants Fiber Interface Module LEDs FIM LED State Meani
109. If 10 seconds elapse before you press a key the system will auto boot Q Tip If you miss the 10 second timeout manually reset the controller by pressing the Reset button The RTC opens and you once again have 10 seconds to complete step 29 30 At VXWorks Boot type c and press ENTER 31 Change the following parameters as indicated in the RTC by inserting the information you recorded in step 25 of Installing 3 3 software upgrading note that the parameters are case sensitive Boot device motfcc File name Boot Install Host inet the IP address of the FTP server PC host your PC User u user name for FTP server in PC host Ftp password pw blank use rsh password for FTP server in PC host Flags f 0 0 for RTC only 32 At VXWorks Boot type or press the Reset button on the controller Timer The system takes approximately 30 minutes to re format the hard drive and install the software Setting your purchased Mitel options 33 Launch a browser if you do not still have one running and go to the IP address of the 3300 Controller for example http lt RTC IP address gt You see the 3300 ICP ESM login page Note Your laptop PC must have the same subnet address as the RTC IP for example 192 168 1 x where x is a variable to launch ESM 200 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 34 Log in to the 3300 ICP ESM using the default username system and password passw
110. LTER FILTER FILTER FILTER FILTER guru pee pe pet larga iqiqu hi ii as 1 M a STATUS LED tore th fe te ore ots 1 Ef INDICATORS SHARED DTMF RECEIVER CIRCUITRY CARD e n smmm mmm oo mom ACTIVITY CODEC SRE Se Sa ae E um b E 0 E R0119 Troubleshoot E amp M Trunk Card Trunk Circuit Configuration TYPES OF INTERFACE CRCUTS SIG NAL CARRIER COLLOCATED SETTYPES TRUNK TYPES TYPEI TYPE Ill TYPEV NOTE SWITCH SECTIONS ARE SNH AND SN 2 WHERE N IS THE PARTICULAR TRUCK CIRCUIT NUMRFR ON THF CARD 0149 SN 1 SN 2 Switches 248 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting MAINTENANCE POSN A TEST RELAYS SNI TRUNK LJ CIRCUIT L NO1 CONNECTOR Li j eel CIRCUITS 4 CONNECTO J2 TRUNK CIRCUIT CIRCUIT NO3 LLL LI TRUNK TEST RELAYS G PER TRUNK POSN B RRO1 Troubleshoot LS GS Trunk Card 4 CIRCUIT MESSAGE Z CIRCUIT 5U Hz METERING REGISTRATION SIP 2 SIP 2 SEE NOTE TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK CONECTOR MODULE MODULE MODULE J STATUS LED D INDICATORS gt COMMON TRUNK connector 2 BUSYADLE 2 TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK m MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE TEST 8 7 RELAYS GS TERM
111. MITEL NETWORKS Integrated 3300 Communications Platform HARDWARE USER GUIDE QA MITEL it s about YOU Table of Contents Chapter 1 Before You Begin Before You 3 Printing the Hardware User Guide 3 What s New in this Release 3 Disclaimer sending ea TE Wea de rA da 4 Trademarks e evi eni ace Wd qed Paka Wiad ot dade aioe Esa OE Sack anal ce eave 4 Copyngnt nce in PE d uet idees bb odd 4 Satety Instr ctions s mius bse ERE RU et Lb ee es 5 Chapter 2 Specifications Specifications os RU ER PRI PUN eed ade Rd Sees 9 Technical Information 9 Technical Characteristics sa uuu u aa ata Qaeda e Re Re RR ded 9 Transmission Characteristics 11 Loss and Level 11 Pais cof ert Et dA Ate 19 E2T CompresslOn s mud es oti he as et xh dos hs er Rie nutu do eB ORA A e ied 35 3300 Controller 4 b estet es ERR A EE 38 100 Controller ur a ea ei asua edenda a de Red Eg 38 Mitel Networks 3300 100 Controller Components
112. OK 9 Select Server Types tab and make sure that PPP Windows WindowsNT3 5 Internet or 10 11 12 13 PPP Internet appears in the Type of Dial Up Server field In the Advanced Options field select Log onto Network and Enable software compression Make sure that only TCP IP is selected in the Allowed network protocols field Select the Scripting tab and enter c program files mitel lmat pridun scp for a 3300 Uni versal NSU c program files miteMmatw2dun scp for a 3300 R2 NSU Click OK Release 3 3 Installing Dial up Connection for Windows 2000 To create a dial up networking connection for Windows 2000 Professional 1 On the Start menu point to Programs point to Accessories click Communications and then click Dial Up Connections Double click Make New Connection and then click Next 3 Select Dial up to the Internet and then click Next Select want to set up my Internet connection manually or want to connect through a local area network LAN Click Next 5 Select connect through a phone line and a modem and then click Next Use the COM Port that has been configured as a NULL Modem connection 38400 8 none 1 In the Choose Modem box from the drop down list select Communications cable between 2 computers Click Next 8 Clear the box Use area code and dialing rules and then click Advanced 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 For the Connection type select PPP Point to P
113. ONS CLASS CLIP line card has a voltage below 120v on the Operation Incoming analog calls are converted to digital PCM signals by one of 16 line circuit modules on the ONS line card Calls are switched by the Main Controller and the two parties are Release 3 3 83 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 84 connected Outgoing calls are converted from PCM digital signals to analog signals by one of the 16 line circuit modules on the ONS line card Calls are switched by the Main Controller and the two parties connected All signals are passed through the 2 wire to 4 wire hybrid circuit on the line circuit module The line busy status LED remains lit while the call is in progress When calls are terminated receipt of an on hook condition turns off the line status LED The call is disconnected from the circuit switch and the line circuit reverts to an idle condition The ONS line card provides for Ground button signaling A ground button on a telephone extension so equipped provides a means of connecting ground to the ring lead In addition to ground button support the ONS line card features a calibrated flash function Unlike telephone installations using ground button signaling telephone extensions using calibrated flash signaling do not require a third wire connected to ground Calibrated flash is also the only method recognized internationally for recall simulation The minimum calibrated flash duration that can be detected by t
114. P Check the logs for any data restore failures see Note below Optional see Note 2 Collect the telephone directory information from the 3300 ICP using the Full Collect application in the Configuration Tool Optional see Note 2 Collect information on the free PLIDs using the Free PLID Collection application Optional see Note 2 Import the csv file that contains the Name Number and PIN information of each Symbol phone user using the Moves Adds and Changes Import application in the Configuration Tool Change the 3300 ICP system name through the System Administration Tool Deprogram the 3200 ICP FD_DSU using the System Administration Tool Install new hardware Network Services Unit or DSU Cabinet Reprogram the digital links Release 3 3 205 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 15 Optional see Note 2 Update the firmware in the Symbol NetVision phone Refer to the Symbol NVP II MINET Update Procedure 16 Optional see Note 2 Complete the programming of the Symbol phone using the Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool Note After the Restore and Reboot check the log file In the System Administration Tool click Maintenance and Diagnostics select Maintenance Commands and click All Type the following text in the Command line type dr logfile_1 and click Submit Note 2 The optional steps are only applicable if the database has Symbol Wireless phones being migrated Upgrade 3800 Wireless Applicati
115. P Hardware User Guide 178 The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four NSUs Note You may need to add a DSP resource to upgrade the 100 User System with any of the following 30 Voice Mail Ports Peripheral cabinet NSU 6500 Speech Enabled Applications See your Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for more information Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Telecom 100 32 Compression IP0472 100 User System Add 32 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 100 user system upgrade to add support for 32 channels of compression and 30 voice mail ports This system uses the following existing modules One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21161 for telecom support Add the following modules One DSP Module 21161 for upgrade to 30 Voice Mail Ports One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels This provides 4 DSP devices for telecom functions for 100 users 30 Voice Mail Ports DSP devices for 32 channels of compression 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity to NSUs Note You may need to add a DS
116. P resource to upgrade the 100 User System with any of the following 30 Voice Mail Ports Peripheral cabinet NSU 6500 Speech Enabled Applications See your Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for more information Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 30 VOICE MAIL PORTS AND 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Telecom Telecom IP0476 250 User System Add Voice Mail Ports 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add support for 30 voice mail ports This system uses the following existing modules One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Add the following module DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides 4DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Release 3 3 179 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 180 Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add voice mail ports to a 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Installthe additional DSP Module Slot 7 3 Replace the cover 250 User System With 30 Voice M
117. Resource Card 9400 200 303 NA Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier Card 9400 200 304 BA SUPERSET Hub Unit 9400 200 306 BA SUPERSET Hub Package 9400 200 310 NA Doors for Control Peripheral Nodes Pkg of 2 9400 300 202 BA Fan 240 VAC Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Hardware continued Part Number Description 9400 300 204 NA AC Power Supply 9400 300 301 NA Fiber Interface Module FIM 9400 300 302 NA Quad FIM Carrier 9400 300 308 NA DSU Slot FIM Carrier 9400 300 310 NA FIM Carrier Card 9401 000 024 NA Music on Hold Paging Unit DNIC MA218AA DS1 Interface Assembly MA225AA PRI Interface Assembly MA233AA Dual 10Base T Interface Assembly for OPS Man MA501AA BRI Interface Assembly MC268AA 6 CCT BRI Card MC268AB 15 CCT BRI card MC269AA PRI Card E1 Dual Link MC269CA CEPT Interface Card MC270AA PRI Card T1 Dual Link MC270CA T1 DS1 Formatter card MC271AA E1 R2 Card MC312AB Peripheral Switch Control Il card MC320CL ONS CLASS Line Card UK with positive disconnect MC320CM ONS CLASS IBR Line Card MC320EA ONS CLASS Line Card 16 circuits MC320FA ONS CLASS Line Card with positive disconnect MC321AC OPS Line Card 8 circuits MC330AB DNI Line Card 16 circuits MC340BA LS GS Trunk Card 8 circuits MC341CA DID Loop Tie Trunk Card 4
118. S Trunk Card In addition T MR and R MR leads can be connected to the CO for message registration purposes The system can record message registration pulses either by polarity reversal over the Tip and Ring leads when the called party answers or by loop signaling from the CO over the second pair of leads Various types of terminations can be used for message registration pulses transmitted from the CO In each case M and MM leads terminate respectively on the T MR and R MR leads A message registration signal is given when the MR contact at the CO is closed E amp M Trunk Card The E amp M Trunk card provides a means of interfacing four external trunk circuits to the system E amp M trunk cards connect to any Peripheral Interface card slot on the peripheral shelf via connectors J1 and J2 E amp M Trunk Card Specifications Variants Available A law UK u law Number of Circuits per Card 4 E amp M trunk circuits Power Consumption Type I mechanical CO 21 45 watts Type electronic CO 8 01 watts Type V 4 83 watt External Loop Resistance Type I 150 ohms Type V 4000 ohms Release 3 3 77 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Features Provided 2 wire 4 wire conversion A D D A conversion E amp M signaling leads 2 dB software switchable VNL pads software selectable standard carrier levels switch selectable 2 wire or 4 wire operation protection isolation against foreign potentials swit
119. SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP Software Only one 3300 ICP can be configured ata time and only one SX 2000 PBX can be migrated to a 3300 ICP at a time Migration and Configuration cannot be performed in a single task or session using the 3300 Configuration Tool After migration configuration must be completed using System Administration Tool Data restoration automatically triggers data migration If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion will fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Windows 2000 users should clear the browser cache To transfer database from SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP 1 7 8 Prepare the SX 2000 LIGHT for migration reduce Peripheral and DSU nodes to a maximum of 4 this figure is a guide only consult a Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for actual figures deprogram unsupported devices and cards AC13 AC15 SCDC DID3 Advanced Tone Detector ISDN Gateway FIM Carrier Card COV Line Card 3DN 4DN SU PERSET 3 SUPERSET 4 SUPERSET 700 SUPERSET 7DN SUPERCONSOLE 2000 and datasets enable MNMS Configuration Management 1 and MNMS Database Access options Program SX 2000 connectivity using Network Element Editor from the Configuration Tool Create a Network Element that is the same as the SX 2000 PBX Backup SX 2000 database datasave to the 3300 Configuration Tool Prepare the 3300 ICP for migration
120. T 13 6 13 G BK 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 39 BK BR 14T 7MWB 7T MR 471 14T 14 BR BK 148 7MWA 7R MR 4R1 14R 40 BK S 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 15 S BK 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 41 Y BL 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 16 BL Y 16R 8MWA 8R MR 4SB 16R Release 3 3 153 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Card Slot 9 Card Slot 9 Connections To Cross Connect Field Pin Color ONS OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 DNI Backplane Code LC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk LC Plugs 42 Y O 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 17 0 Y 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 43 YIG 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 18 G Y 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 44 YIBR 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 19 BR Y 3R 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 45 YIS 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 20 S Y 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 46 VIBL 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P5 21 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 47 VIO 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 22 ON 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 48 VIG 4T 4T 2E 4T 23 GN 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 49 V BR 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2M 8T 24 BR V 8R 4MWA 4R MR 2SB 8R 50 1 SPARE 25 qe SPARE 42 Y O 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 17 O Y 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 43 Y G 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3T1 10T 18 G Y 10R 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 44 Y BR 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 19 BR Y 11R 6R 6R 356 4R 6R 11R 45 YIS 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3M 12T 20 S Y 12R 6MWA 6R MR 3SB 12R 46 V BL 13T 4T 7T 13T P6 21 BL V 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 47 VIO 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4T1 14T 22 ON
121. T HUB 0 Install the Digital Service Unit Devices 12 Connect the Controller to the LAN 13 Launch the System Administration Tool to program the system Refer to Overview of Programming Q Tip You can complete all of the programming without having physical connections to the Controller After programming you can connect units to the controller and then power up the system Installation Planner 114 The following required and default settings are necessary for an installation System Administration Tool username Default system password Default password Controller Configuration RTC Default Settings EE to boot device ata 0 0 processor number 0 host name file name sysro RTC8260 inet on ethernet e 192 168 1 2 IP address subnet mask inet on backplane b host inet h IP address of the ftp server gateway inet g Default Gateway user u ftp FTP user installer s PC ftp password pw FTP password installer s PC Release 3 3 Installing Controller Configuration RTC flags f 0x0 target name tn startup scripts s other o motfcc DHCP Configuration for scope supporting IP Voice devices IP Address Scope Start Address End Address Subnet Mask Lease Duration Days Hours Minutes Options for all devices Identifier Data Type Va
122. TP server in the IIS PWS FTP site and also that it is programmed on the RTC 2 From your laptop PC ping the 3300 ICP to verify that you have established a connection Backing up the database Back up the 3300 ICP database including voice mail to your laptop PC using the following procedure 3 Launch a browser if you do not already have one running 4 Go to the IP address of the 3300 Controller You see the 3300 ICP Embedded System Management ESM login page Note that your laptop PC must have the same subnet address as the RTC IP for example 192 168 1 x to launch the ESM Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Enter the customer s username and password You see the main ESM tools menu Click System Administration Tool Click in the Selection drop down menu where it says Click here to start Click Maintenance and Diagnostics then click Back up Read the section Trusting the Backup Restore Applet then follow the instructions to copy the identitydb obj file to your PC if required 10 In the section Performing the backup enter the path on your local drive to store the backup for example C 3300_ICP backup 11 Enter a name for your backup file 12 Click Yes to include the voice mail messages in your backup Note The upgrade will erase the voice mail messages in your system so you need to back them up now Note that including voice mail messages can significantly i
123. Troubleshoot the CEPT DS1 Formatter 250 Troubleshoot the Conference Card 250 Troubleshoot the PRI Card 251 Troubleshoot the R2 Card 252 Other cT an a E 253 Troubleshooting eux hotbed ae hal tis 253 Release 3 3 Chapter 1 Before You Begin 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 2 Release 3 3 Before You Begin Before You Begin Printing the Hardware User Guide You can access a printable version ofthe Hardware User Guide from the System Administration Tool Help and from our web site Note You must have Adobe Acrobat Reader to view and print the Hardware User Guide Ifyou need a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader it is available for download at http www adobe com acrobat Go to section What s New in this Release to find a list of changes to software and hardware from one product version to the next What s New in this Release 3300 ICP Release 3 3 New 3300 100 user chassis and configurations Geographic expansion See Loss Level and Tone Plans Updates to IP TDM G 729 compression Upgrading 250 700 User systems to 30 Voice Mail ports New Software Upgrade procedure 3300 ICP Release 3 2 Single software build select your country to set the appropriate language
124. UTION Wear an anti static strap whenever you handle circuit cards 1 Power down the Peripheral Unit 2 Replace the faulty peripheral switch controller card with the new peripheral switch con troller card 3 Power up the Peripheral Unit Install a Dual 10Base T Interface Assembly To replace a Dual 10Base T Interface Assembly 1 Remove the front panels 2 Disconnect the Ethernet cables from port J5 on each of the Ethernet Interface cards Note that disconnecting these cables disconnects access to the switch from OPS Manager and raises an alarm on the OPS Manager station Release 3 3 217 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 218 3 Goto the rear of the cabinet 10 11 12 13 14 15 Disconnect the Ethernet LAN cables from the dual 10Base T connector assembly The dual 10Base T connector assembly is located in the 12th FIM slot Remove and retain the two screws that fasten the dual 10Base T connector assembly to the fiber carrier box Remove the dual 10Base T connector assembly and carefully draw the attached cables out through the 12th FIM slot If the cables become entangled do not attempt to force them from the cabinet Reach in through the front of the cabinet and free the cables Unpack the replacement 10Base T connector assembly Insert the cables that are attached to the replacement 10Base T connector assembly into the 12th FIM slot Go to the front of the cabinet and carefully draw t
125. Yellow Alarm Alarm Indication Signal AIS or Blue Alarm Loss of Frame Alignment Excessive CRC errors Note To determine if a Universal T1 is PRI T1 DS1 T1 Formatter you must check the card by inspecting the lock latch or using the Firmware command Dual Port E1 PRI Universal E1 Card Features 2 048 Mbps primary rate 30B D connectivity 2 links e enable or disable Generation and detection of the following status indications Loss of Signal LOS or Yellow Alarm Alarm Indication Signal AIS or Blue Alarm Loss of Frame Alignment Excessive CRC errors Programmable Data Inversion NA only This feature is required for inter working with T1 D4 and BRI interfaces that have inverted in band data enabled on a per call basis This feature is programmed on a link by link basis default means no inversion Administration of PRI Card Software The IMAT ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool software runs on an independent computer with a Windows 95 98 or 2000 Professional operating system The IMAT computer is used for programming and maintaining the PRI configuration databases It accesses the PRI card either through a direct connection on site or remotely through a modem To install the IMAT application refer to the PRI software CD ROM jacket For more information on IMAT see Using the ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool IMAT Options are managed and controlled as features on
126. a bits no parity 1 stop bit ASCII character set and XON XOFF flow control NSU Chaining NSU chaining refers to the physical connection of two NSUs together on one fiber interface from the Controller BRI NSUs may not be chained To connect two NSUs to the Controller 1 Connect the first NSU to the controller through a fiber connection from the fiber port on the NSU to the fiber port on the 3300 Controller 2 Using a CAT5 crossover cable make a connection from 2 on the first NSU to CIM1 on the second NSU 3 Connect power to the NSU Note The first NSU must have the Message Link dip switch set to 1 up The second NSU must have the Message Link dip switch set to 2 down Install the 3300 Universal ASU Before you begin ensure that there is a free CIM port on the 3300 Controller To install the 3300 Universal ASU 1 Mount the 3300 Universal ASU in the 19 inch rack if applicable 2 Connect the supplied Cross over Category 5 cable with RJ 45 connector to the CIM port on the 3300 Universal ASU and a free CIM port on the 3300 Controller Note that up to four ASUs can be connected to the 3300 Controller Release 3 3 135 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3 Complete telephony cabling 4 Complete programming 5 Connect power to the 3300 Universal ASU CIM LEDs will be on once the CIM link syn chronizes The 3300 Controller will detect the 3300 Universal ASU and the application software will download and sta
127. ace Assembly 8 Remove the DS1 Formatter Card If the card is E1 T1 051 Formatter card set the links for either E1 or T1 operation by using the E1 T1 switches located on the side ofthe card For E1 operation see Connecting to MSDN CEPT links 10 Set the DS1 Formatter card line equalizer switches S1 and S2 11 Re install the DS1 Formatter card 12 Remove the anti static strap from your wrist CEPT Interface Assembly and Cabling If you install a CEPT Formatter card you must also install a CEPT Interface Assembly and connect the cables The CEPT Interface Assembly provides four filtered BNC connectors for the external cables required by one CEPT Formatter card You can mount up to four CEPT Interface Assemblies on a SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT node or an SX 2000 DSU node Each CEPT Interface Assembly plugs into a J3 DIN 3 X 32 connector These connectors are located in a 9 cm x 12 5 cm 3 5 inch x 5 inch metal box that projects from the backplane To install the CEPT Interface Assembly or CEPT Interface Assembly II and Cables 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Release 3 3 163 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 2 Unpack the CEPT Interface Assembly Inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged 3 Setthe CEPT Interface Assembly jumpers to the desired positions Locate the slot in the DSU box that corresponds to the DSU slot that holds the CEPT Formatter card When you are facing the rear panel the DSU box slots
128. ackets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country E2T Compression The 3300 ICP supports G 729ac voice compression The compression of a standard call effectively reduces the voice payload bandwidth required per call from 64 kbps to approximately 8 kbps plus packet overhead Voice compression on the 3300 ICP can be divided into two types IP phone to IP phone and IP phone to TDM analog devices With IP phone to IP phone connection where included voice compression is handled by the phone s own DSP resources An exception to this is when a basic IP set is used such as the Mitel Networks 5001 IP Phone 5201 IP Phone 5005 IP phone or 5205 IP Phone For an IP phone to a non IP device G 729ac compression will be provided through the purchase of compression licenses and 21161 Quad DSP Modules One DSP module provides up to 32 channels of voice compression The 250 User and 700 User controllers have the capacity for the installation of two modules providing a maximum of 64 channels of compression Compression is carried out by the 21161 Quad DSP under the control of the E2T Compression zones are programmed on the 3300 ICP Phones are typically put in the default zone which does not have compression turned on and all calls within this zone will not be compressed Phones can be placed on other zones and compression may be turned on or off Full details are covered in the System Administration Tool online help In the f
129. ad the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 250 User to 700 User System No Compression Channels 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to 700 user system This system uses the following existing modules One RTC 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One E2T 3 0 3 1 133 MHz 3 2 3 3 300 MHz One Dual FIM Module One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Add the following modules 186 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support One Dual FIM Module One 64 Channel Echo Canceller Note A second 64 channel Echo Canceller can be added or the existing 64 channel Echo Canceller can be replaced by a 128 channel Echo Canceller If you choose to add a second Echo Canceller the controller must be operating on version 3 2 software The 3 0 3 1 software does not support two 64 echo cancellers This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions 30 Voice Mail Ports 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four External FIM connections Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To upgrade a 250 user system to a 700 user system Qv c eo INE Remove the cover Install the new Dual FIM Modules slot 2
130. added For example A three party conference is set up between a TDM device on Node A a TDM device on Node B and a TDM device on Node C The nodes are connected over the WAN using IP trunking Two compression licenses are required on Node A for the WAN connection to Node B and Node C One compression license is required on Node B for the WAN connection to Node A One compression license is required on Node C for the WAN connection to Node A Voice mail and compression Compression is not invoked with calls to voice mail No licences are required Music on Hold and compression Music played through an IP connection will be compressed based on the same rules as any other connection to that phone Because the music source is by nature a TDM device if sent through a connection that requires compression it willuse a compression license on the system to which the music is connected and on the second system of an IP trunked call if it goes toa TDM phone there Release 3 3 37 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3300 Controller 100 Controller Mitel Networks 7 3300 100 Controller Components Front Panel Remote Alarm port DB 9 connector Two RS 232 ports DB 9 connectors Printer and Maintenance Dual fiber interface module FIM ports to support the NSUs Network Services Units or the Peripheral unit e Two 10 100 Ethernet connections via RJ 45 8 CAT5 cross over cable Note Only the first connection i
131. ail Ports Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller IPO4 250 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add support for 32 compression channels This system uses the following existing modules One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Add the following module One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs This provides 4DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users 4DSP devices 21161 for 32 channels of compression 32 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 32 compression channels to a 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Install the additional DSP Module Slot 3 3 Replace the cover 250 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 8 Slot 5 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 21161 DSP Compression 0410 Note Some con
132. al Unit with extended Per 8 Not Supported ASUs 4 2 Trunks analog and digital combined 628 628 BRI U Interfaces with NSU 60 30 Release 3 3 117 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 118 Hardware Capacity continued IP trunks 200 50 ONS Lines 700 700 DNI Channels 2368 2368 Attendant Consoles 24 16 IP Devices 700 100 DNI Devices 756 756 Programmable Key Modules 75 75 Many of the capacities in this table are not true hardware limitations but are limits set by software on the number of hardware devices that can be programmed Most systems will reach physical limitations before these large numbers of devices are reached 3300 ICP Software Feature Capacity for all 3300 Controller Options Parameter Name Number ACDII Agent Groups 32 64 Agents per Group 150 500 ACDII Agent IDs 1181 ACDII Agent Paths 256 Attendant Console Groups 48 Attendant Console Calls Waiting 72 Broadcast Groups 1875 Members per Broadcast Group 32 Busy Lamp Groups Monitored Devices 439 Members per Busy Lamp Group 16 Call Reroute Always 176 Call Reroute 1st Alternates 336 Call Reroute 2nd Alternates 32 Class of Restriction COR 96 Class of Service COS 96 Conferences maximum 8 Conferees in a conference maximum 8 Default Account Codes 225 Departments in Tel Dir 2000 Digit Modification Tables 256
133. all the Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 PC Note Although the 3200 ICP FD_DSU programming is restored to the 3300 ICP you must deprogram the DSU and reprogram using the System Administration Tool after you install new hardware To transfer database from a 3200 ICP to a 3300 ICP 1 10 11 12 13 14 Prepare the 3200 ICP for migration deprogram unsupported devices and cards AC15 SCDC ISDN Gateway COV Line Card 3DN 4DN SUPERSET 3 SUPERSET 4 SUPERSET 7DN and datasets Change OPS Manager Settings Program 3200 ICP connectivity using the Configuration Tool Create a Network Element that is the same as the 3200 ICP Back up 3200 ICP database datasave to the 3300 Configuration Tool or copy a datasave from OPS Manager to the Configuration Tool Prepare the 3300 ICP for migration Enable Options and manually reboot the system Change the System name in the System Options Assignment to match that of the system being migrated Set the IP Address Host Name FTP Username and FTP password to match the Configuration Tool PC in the Controller Registry Configuration form In the Configuration Tool Network Element Editor change the Variant to 3300 ICP and change the IP Address if required Perform a Restore of the 3200 ICP converted database onto the 3300 ICP An automatic validation operation occurs to determine if the restore can proceed Reboot the 3300 IC
134. ame and password 45 Click System Administration Tool click Maintenance and Diagnostics click Maintenance Commands then click All 46 Issue the dbms stat command to check if the DBMS flag DBMS INITIALIZED is ON 47 Issue the Type dr logfile 1 command to display the log file created during the Data Restore 48 Issue the mess sub command to checkthe programmed NSU links they should be OPEN If any programmed links are in SCAN check the LINK STATUS LEDs ifthe AMBER LEDs are chasing this means that the NSUs are writing to the RAM DISK Resetting to initialize Voice Mail 49 When the checks are complete manually reset the controller again to ensure that Voice Mail is properly initialized Note If additional voice mail ports have been purchased you should program these first and then manually reset the controller Upgrading IP sets and forcing lease renewals 50 Log back in to ESM and issue the LOAD IPDevice 1 to X where X represents the last IP device number to upgrade the IP phones 51 If you have an IP console you must cycle the power on the IP TKB key pad 52 If the system has a Legacy Per cab with DNI Line cards we recommend that you issue the Load x x x command to load the DNI cards and ensure that the latest DNI line load is loaded If you are using internal DHCP issuing this command will also renew your set leases and prevent the random resetting of your IP sets when their current lease expires Upgrade
135. an the ferrule tips on the connectors with ethyl alcohol 78 Release 3 3 Specifications Fiber optic cables are often more easily installed and pulled than copper because of their light weight and flexibility However take care not to exceed the minimum bend radius or maximum tensile strength Procedures for the repairing splicing or assembling fiber optic cables are available from fiber component manufacturers many offer training courses WARNING Fiber optic sources emit infrared light that is invisible to the human eye Never look directly into a source or into the end of a fiber energized by a source because it can damage the retina When working with raw fiber optic cable be careful of the fiber ends or slivers that can puncture the skin or cause irritation Specifications At each end of a fiber optic cable is a Fiber Interface Module FIM At the transmitting end the FIM converts electrical signals into pulses of light to be transmitted over the cable At the receiving end the FIM converts the pulses of light back into electrical signals usable by the node The FIM connects the 3300 Controller to a peripheral unit or DSU These FIMs cannot be installed in the Applications Gateway Each FIM variant may be identified by its optical wavelength and fiber type indicated on the FIM faceplate The same FIM variant must be used at each end of a fiber optic cable However a node may be equipped with different FIM var
136. and L1 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Universal NSU Link Status ST status flashing operational flashing in 1 2 second intervals off not operational solid card is booting or not operating should be blinking in 1 2 sec intervals LO and L1 right side solid red no Layer 1 on front and rear right side off no error panel left side solid green D channel established PRI Layer 1 established T1 E1 DPNSS left side flashing green Layer 1 established PRI left side off no link right side yellow with left side flashing green alarm indication from far end right side yellow with left side off blue alarm from card normal during link startup PRI NA or response to yellow yellow and green alternating between LO and L1 downloading 15 25 minutes yellow alternating between LO and L1 decompressing and copying files 2 4 minutes Copper Interface Module LEDs CIM LED State Description Off No Power Flashing Powered On BSP Running On Communication Link synchronized with 3300 Controller Message Link Controlled Card status LED State Meaning Green On no error Yellow On out of service Red On error does not necessarily indicate total failure Green and Yellow On out of service this combination may occur at power up Green and Red On a fault ha
137. ard 19 1U rack mounting hardware included 16 8 Watts output per port 24 port model has a 200W overall power limit IEEE 802 3af Draft 3 0 compliant power outputs Release 3 3 105 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Front Panel DATA amp POWER OUTPUT PORTS dmm SSS emm RECESS guum ws mmm T 3 INPUT 5 CONSOLE IP0423 10 100BASE TX Data Input Ports Lower 24 Ports The PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit has 24 10 Base T 100 Base Tx data input ports configured as Media Dependant Interface MDI non crossover These ports are designed to carry Ethernet Data only Tx Rx over the standard 2 wire pairs RJ 45 pins 1 2 and 3 6 10 100BASE TX Data amp Power Output Ports Upper 24 Ports The PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit has 24 Data amp Power ports configured as MDI non crossover These ports are designed to carry Ethernet Data over the standard 2 wire pairs RJ 45 pins 1 2 and 3 6 and DC Power Source over the spare wire pair RJ 45 pins 4 5 and 7 8 According to the IEEE 802 3 standard the maximum allowable distance between two Ethernet links is 100m 328ft The PowerDsine 24PT In Line Power Unit is IEEE 802 3af Draft 3 0 compliant Console Port The console port DB 9 connector allows one to connect a terminal and perform local out of band management The console port uses a standard null modem cable and is set to 19 200 baud 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit
138. ave any Release 3 0 3300 ICPs that are accessible from the IP set during its boot sequence You must ensure that the IP Phone will get the R3 2 set firmware load 2 If R3 1 ICPs are located in the same DHCP domain as the R3 2 ICP please update the R3 1 IP Phone TFTP Server firmware 3 The set must be powered from a wall plug before connecting to the IP network 4 After connection to the IP network the IP set will receive a new load from the 3300 ICP 5 After the set has received its updated load the 3300 Power Dongle can be inserted in the Ethernet path and the power cord removed 170 Release 3 3 Installing CAUTION Sets released from the factory after Release 3 2 will have the boot capability built into them They will not have to follow the above set configuration sequence However if in doubt the above configuration steps should be followed Mixed Release 3 1 and 3 2 Network The 3300 ICP Release 3 2 software will be delivered into existing IP trunking configurations made up of 3300 ICPs running Release 3 1 software To support the Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP in these configurations all IP sets requiring the CDP protocol will need Release 3 2 set firmware Every IP telephone must receive the Release 3 2 set firmware during its boot sequence All 3300 ICPs in the DHCP domain must have the 128 IP Phone TFTP Server refer to the Release 3 2 set firmware load The IP Phone TFTP Server is part of the DHCP options form
139. ber Unobtainable 400 Continuous Paging 440 0 2 on off Ringing External 400 450 1 on 2 off repeat Special Busy 400 0 35 on 0 35 off repeat Special Ringing 400 450 0 4 on 0 2 of 0 4 on 2 off repeat Internal Transfer Dial 350 440 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Interrupted Dial 350 440 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Release 3 3 33 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Tone Output Level gt iACO iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Busy 9 8 6 11 5 4 5 5 6 5 44 13 11 16 10 9 10 40 11 10 49 18 16 21 15 14 15 15 16 15 Dial 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Camp on 9 8 6 11 5 4 5 5 6 5 14 13 11 16 10 9 10 10 11 10 19 18 16 21 15 14 15 15 16 15 Conference 14 13 11 16 10 9 10 10 11 10 Confirmation 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17 18 18 19 18 Feature Active Dial 8 7 5 10 4 3 4 4 5 4 12 11 9 14 8 7 8 8 9 8 17 16 14 19 13 12 13 13 14 13 22 21 19 24 18 17
140. binet into an anti static bag 1 Remove the plate located underneath the controller this willinvolve removing the 6 border screws Attach the Hard Drive securely to the plate using the four screws provided Attach the power cable Attach the SCSI cable Carefully insert the Hard Drive into the controller Secure the plate onto the chassis with the 6 border screws Release 3 3 121 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install the System ID Module 122 The system ID module is shipped with the software You must install the system ID module in the 3300 ICP controller The module contains a unique identifier that the system reads on start up 250 700 User Controller To install the System ID Module Remove the cover 2 Press firmly to seat the module on the board In the 250 user and 700 user controllers placement of the System ID Module is between Slot 1 the Dual FIM and Slot 8 the DSP The module will cover the MMC 8 text printed on the board 3 Replace the cover System ID Module Placement on 250 User and 700 User Systems wi a a a 421 100 User Controller To install the System ID Module Remove the cover 2 Press firmly to seat the module on the board In the 100 user controller placement is behind Slot 2 3 Replace the cover Release 3 3 Installing System ID Module Placement on 100 User System 2 o 29 3 a
141. ble Operating System Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 or Windows Professional Note The 3300 Configuration Tool and OPS Manager cannot be installed on the same server Install the 3300 Configuration Tool The 3300 Configuration Tool PC must have Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Professional operating system In addition the Java Plug in 1 1 3 by Sun Microsystems is required the Java Plug in is shipped with the 3300 Configuration Tool software Ensure that Internet Information Server 5 is installed Clear your Internet Explorer cache To install the 3300 Configuration Tool oo p Insert the 3300 Configuration Tool CD ROM into the CD ROM drive Open Explorer and double click the QUICKSetup_Quick exe file in the root directory of the CD ROM drive Click Yes to the prompt This will install Mitel Networks Configuration Tool version number Do you Wish to Continue Click OK to the message related to your operating system Click Next at the Welcome page Click Yes to accept the license agreement Click Next to select the default destination folder or click Browse to install in a different folder Click Next to begin copying files to the target directory Release 3 3 Installing 9 Click Yes to stop any Internet Services The install shield will then install Oracle followed by Mitel Utilities 10 Close the C WINNT SYSTEM32 cmd exe window 11 Click Finish 12 Reboot the PC 13 Install and co
142. bleshoot the 3300 BRI NSU 237 Troubleshoot the 3300 Universal ASU 237 Troubleshoot the 3300 ASU 238 Troubleshoot the 3300 In Line Power Unit 238 Release 3 3 vii 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide viii Troubleshooting sac soe tas u eis na edie DESEE n aie e UE ae eae E 239 Peripherals Unit ss ance cae a e luna q gale od RD eines 242 Troubleshoot Fiber Interface Module 242 Troubleshoot the DID Loop Tie Trunk Card 243 Troubleshoot the DNI Line Card 243 Troubleshoot the DTMF Receiver Card 244 Troubleshoot E amp M Trunk Card 244 Troubleshoot LS GS Trunk Card 245 Troubleshoot the ONS Line Card 247 Troubleshoot the ONS CLASS CLIP Card 247 Troubleshoot the OPS Line Card 248 DSU NOde serio bate qas sapa aa q Sh thea g s 248 Troubleshoot Fiber Interface Module 248 Troubleshoot the BRI Card 249
143. boot device ata 0 0 Boot device is Disk unit number 0 default leave at 0 not used processor number 0 default leave at 0 not used host name optional file name sysro Rtc8260 boot location and file name inet on ethernet e 134 199 63 11 ffffff00 example RTC IP and subnet mask Note Type the IP address and subnet mask The subnet mask must be in hexadecimal format for the end user s site for example ffffff represents 255 255 255 00 inet on backplane b host inet h gateway inet g 134 199 63 251 example Router Gateway address Note Enter the IP address of the end user s gateway for the 3300 Controller user u ftp must be ftp for Release 3 1 ftp password ftp blank flags f 0x0 a fixed IP address 0x40 is used on E2T for DHCP target name tn startup script s other o motfcc other device E2T using Network to boot from Release 3 3 125 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 8 9 Press the Reset button on the 3300 Controller Remove the Serial connection The system will return to service in about 10 to 15 minutes Note It may be helpful to leave the serial connection in place to capture any potential errors Install the 3300 Configuration Tool 126 Hardware Requirements The minimum PC requirements for installing the 3300 Configuration Tool are CPU Pentium II 333MHz Memory 256 MB RAM Ethernet Card Ethernet Cable Serial Port Serial Ca
144. card converts the following Incoming MF R2 signals from the PSTN into Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS signals for the 3300 ICP system Outgoing DPNSS signals from the 3300 ICP into MF R2 signals for the PSTN R2 signaling Although many countries use R2 signaling most do not adhere to the CCITT recommendations in their entirety and there are many protocol variations around the world R2 support on the 3300 ICP system provides exceptional flexibility which enables you to support the regional variations in the R2 protocol Line signaling tone interpretation and timing parameters for the R2 card can be adapted to suit any national or regional requirement For example Line signaling features allow you to program up to four bits to define the incoming and outgoing patterns for line commands such as Idle and Answer Register signaling features allow you to program the type of address signaling termination signaled or timed and whether signaling should be fully compelled or semi compelled These features also allow you to define each register signaling tone individually Using IMAT ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool you can adapt line signaling tone interpretation and timing parameters for the R2 card to suit any national or regional requirement For more information about IMAT refer to Using the ISDN Maintenance and Administration Tool IMAT Line Signaling In the R2 protocol line signaling is us
145. cated data channels of a link must be set for 64kbps operation You must also reverse the polarity of the dataset Tx and Rx leads at one of the PBXs For consistency always reverse the dataset leads on the system with the E1 T1 DS1 Formatter card Basic Rate Interface BRI Card The BRI card provides an interface between either six 6 circuit card or fifteen 15 circuit card ISDN basic rate interface U bus circuits and one CEPT circuit The card converts the Euro ISDN or North American National ISDN 1 and ISDN 2 protocols used by the BRI circuits to the DPNSS protocol used by the CEPT circuit The connections to and from the BRI card are made via the CEPT Interface Assembly mounted at the back of the DSU cabinet These connections are DPNSS Tx to the CEPT Interface Assembly Rx port via a BNC to BNC connector e DPNSS Rx to the CEPT Interface Assembly Tx port via a BNC to BNC connector BRI U bus tip and ring pairs via a D type to Amphenol connector MMI connection to the configuration terminal via an RJ45 to D type connector Provision for an RJ45 Ethernet port as a future development of the card EZ Note The BRI card Release 2 supports both User and Network Termination for European installations only Release 3 3 Specifications BRI Cable Pinout for 6 port Card
146. ch changes Trademarks Mitel Networks MiTAIl SUPERSET SX 2000 are trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation Windows and Microsoft are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Incorporated Adobe Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Copyright Trademark of MITEL Networks Corporation Copyright 2002 MITEL Networks Corporation All rights reserved 4 Release 3 3 Before You Begin Safety Instructions You can access a printable version of the Safety Instructions from our edocs web site Note You must have Adobe Acrobat Reader to view and print the Safety Instructions If you need a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader it is available for download at http www adobe com acrobat Release 3 3 5 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 6 Release 3 3 Chapter 2 Specifications 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 8 Release 3 3 Specifications Specifications Technical Information Technical Characteristics Signaling and Supervisory Tones The standard range of programmed tones are composed of 12 DTMF sets of tones 1 set of tones that form part of the call progress tone plan e 1 test of 1004 Hz digital milliwatt DTMF Signaling Input Signaling The system is capable of accepting and repeating the standard DTMF to
147. ch selectable E amp M types self test capability automatic card identification Compliance Complies with all pertinent sections EIA Standard RS 464 E amp M Trunk Card Settings The E amp M trunk card accommodates E amp M interface circuits Types I through V The configuration of the four trunk circuits on the E amp M trunk card to accommodate these five interface types is accomplished by using DIP switches SN 1 and SN 2 These DIP switches must be set on site as follows SN 1 and SN 2 Switch Settings Types of Interface Cards Switch Positions Signal carrier set Co located trunk SN 1 SN 2 types types TYPE NONE A B TYPE II TYPE Il B A TYPE IV TYPE IV B A TYPE V TYPE B B TYPE V TYPE III B B TYPE V TYPE V B B Note Positions are SN 1 and SN 2 where N is the particular trunk circuit number on the card 1 through 4 Operation In addition to the E amp M trunk types that can be configured by using DIP switches it is also possible to configure various software options via system programming The software options can be changed at any time using the System Administration Tool Fiber Interface Module FIM Guidelines for Handling Fiber Optic Cable Never touch the tip of a fiber connector Cleanliness of the connector ferrule tip is impor tant for error free transmission Always place the dust caps onto the connectors immediately after disconnecting You can cle
148. circuits MC342BB E amp M Tie Trunk Card 4 circuits MP914AA AC Power Converter MT914AD Power Converter for the MICRO LIGHT 220v MW401AA BRI Cable MDF 3 meter 25 pair cable MW401AB BRI Cable MDF 10 meter 25 pair cable MW402AA BRI CEPT Cables MW403AA BRI MMI Cable MW404AA R2 Card RJ 45 to Coaxial Adapter cable 2X BNC Software Options 50002690 3300 3 1 Base Software Replacement Software CD ROM 50002953 3300 3 2 Base Software Replacement Software CD ROM 50003343 3300 3 3 Base Software Upgrade Software CD ROM IP Console Software Hard Drive Handbook 50003346 3300 3 3 Base Software CD ROM SysID Hard Drive Handbook Release 3 3 229 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 230 Hardware continued Part Number Description 50003348 3300 3 3 Base Software CD ROM and Handbook 50003344 3300 3 3 Base Software CD ROM 54000291 3300 User License One User 54000294 3300 Device License One Device 54000297 3300 Mail Box License One Mail Box 54000300 3300 ACD Agent License One Agent 54000303 3300 Network Link License 54000497 3300 XNET Networking License 54000540 3300 IP Networking License 54000582 3340 Branch Office Solution Upgrade NA 54000581 3340 Branch Office Solution Upgrade UK 54000580 3340 Branch Office Solution Upgrade LA 54000650 3300 Compression License 8 Channels 9125 271 000 NA R2 Application CD ROM Softwa
149. connector on the backplane of the system 7 Secure the Interface Assembly to the extension bracket with the screws provided 162 Release 3 3 Installing DS1 Interface Assembly and Cabling If you installa DS1 Formatter Card you must also installa DS1 Interface Assembly and connect the external cables The DS1 Interface Assembly provides two filtered DB 15 pin connectors for the external cables required by one DS1 Formatter Card You can mount up to four DS1 Interface Assemblies in he DSU To install the DS1 Interface Assembly and Cables 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the DS1 Interface Assembly Inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged Locate the slot in the DSU that corresponds to the DSU slot that holds the DS1 Formatter card When you are facing the rear panel the DSU slots from right to left correspond to DSU slots 3 1 2 to 3 1 5 or on the SX 2000 they correspond to DSU slots 2 to 5 4 Remove the cover plate from the slot on the metal box by unscrewing the two screws that hold it in place 5 Insert the DS1 Interface Assembly into the empty slot in the DSU box and plug it into the DIN connector in the back of the DSU box 6 Align the screw holes on the DS1 Interface Assembly faceplate with the screw holes in the metal box and fasten the faceplate to the box 7 Connect the 22 AWG 22 IWG shielded twisted pair cables from the external network to the DB 15 pin connectors on the 051 Interf
150. ctive LED that is lit corresponds to the end device that is not working The 3300 In Line Power Unit has successfully identified the end device as Power over LAN Enabled and is providing power Try to connect a different end device to the same port if the end operates there is probably an internal fault in the previous end device The Power Active and Power Not Active LEDs on one port are not lit and the corresponding end device does not operate The 3300 In Line Power Unit did not detect a connected end device and therefore the port is not providing power Verify that you are using a standard UTP Category 5 6 or 6e cable including all 8 wires 4 pairs Verify that you are not using a crossover twisted pair wire Verify that the end device is connected to the Data amp Power Out port upper RJ 45 connector Try to re connect the same end device into a different port on the same unit if it works there is probably a faulty port or RJ 45 connection Try to bypass the long twisted pair cable and bring the end device close to the 3300 In Line Power Unit and connect to one of the ports using a short cable if it works there is probably a faulty connection or short on the long cable or one bad RJ 45 connection along the line If possible try to connect the end device into a different 3300 In Line Power Unit if it works the 3300 In Line Power Unit is probably faulty Try to power it up again and verify a c
151. ctly right side off no error left side solid green AB signaling established left side flashing green Layer 1 established left side off no link right side yellow alarm indication from far end with left side flashing green right side yellow with left side blue alarm from card normal during off link startup Yellow and green alternating downloading 15 25 minutes between LO and L1 Yellow alternating between LO decompressing copying files 2 4 andL1 minutes Copper Interface Module LEDs CIM LED State Meaning Off No Power Flashing Powered On BSP Running On Communication Link synchronized with 3300 Controller 240 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshoot the 3300 BRI NSU One status LED and fifteen circuit LEDs are mounted on the faceplate The status LED shows the status of the CEPT link and each of the circuit LEDs shows the status of one BRI circuit The BRI circuit LEDs are also used during card initialization to indicate the progress of the self test and to indicate that the download is in progress CEPT LED State Meaning Off CEPT link not established Flashing at 1 Hz Layer 1 established Flashing at 4 Hz Layer 2 established On Call in progress on the DPNSS link 3300 BRI NSU CEPT Port DIP Switch Manufacture Settings DIP Switch Use Setting Notes 1 Tx Ground Up Off ungrounded Not
152. cts the frame synchronization information and decodes the data Control and status information are extracted and further decoded The checksum is verified and an error counter updated The status information and data are combined frame aligned and re formatted for output The control section generates control signals and the transmit clocks This section also regenerates the telephony clocks for the peripheral nodes and provides status information for the Main Controller Two LEDs indicate the detection of local and remote clocks DID Loop Tie Trunk Card The DID LT Trunk card terminates up to four trunks These trunks can be Direct Inward Dialing DID trunks Loop Tie LT trunks or any combination of DID and LT Trunks Direct Inward Dialing provides direct access to system subscriber lines from the public telephone network Loop Tie provides a means of connecting two systems together over a common trunk The assignment of trunk types is programmed through the System Administration Tool Programmable parameters include Dial In Trunk versus Non Dial In Trunk and Loop Pulsing versus Battery Ground Pulsing DID Loop Tie Trunk Card Specifications Variants Available A law UK u law Number of Circuits per Card 4 DID Loop Tie trunk circuits Power Consumption Incoming mode DID DDI 15 01 watts Outgoing mode Loop Tie 5 28 watts Mixed Both ways 10 14 watts External Circuit Resistance 2450 ohms Ex
153. d from a Cisco mid span or a Catalyst series end span power hub To install the 3300 Power Dongle 1 Connect the RJ 45 output male end of the power dongle to the IP Phone network con nector located on the underside of the telephone 2 Connect the LAN cable male end to the power dongle RJ 45 input female end Release 3 3 169 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide The 3300 Power Dongle will permit the Mitel IP Phone to receive power from Cisco powered LAN ports The dongle will accept 48VDC across pins 1 2 and 3 6 from the end span hub and pins 4 5 and 7 8 from the mid span hub In either case the 3300 Power Dongle 48VDC output appears on pins 4 5 and 7 8 TO IP PHONE 3300 CISCO POWER DONGLE O Oc O OO c 3 oo NETWORK LAN CONNECTION Pre Release 3 2 IP Phones The Mitel IP set must conform to the Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP startup sequence to sustain power to the set from a Cisco switch or hub through the 3300 Power Dongle The updated set firmware load is delivered as part of the 3300 ICP Release 3 2 software WARNING Sets delivered prior to Release 3 2 will NOT be equipped with the firmware download capability Special configuration is required to permit these telephones to be powered from a Cisco switch or hub through the 3300 Power Dongle To make the Mitel IP telephone conform to the Cisco Discovery Protocol 1 Verify that the IP network to which the set will be connected does not h
154. ded or rerouted Switchhook Flash 60 1500 ms Length of time that a switchhook can be flashed without dropping the trunk or line Ringing Timer 60 300s The length of time a station rings another station before the call is terminated Line and Trunk Support Characteristics NA The North American variant of the system supports the following line and trunk parameters 10 Station Loop The industry standard station loop range including the station apparatus can be up to a maximum of 600 ohms ONS Line DNI Device Ranges Any device which interfaces to a DNI line card has a loop length of 2 kilometers 6600 ft with 24 0 6mm or 26 0 45mm AWG twisted pair cable with no bridge taps and one kilometre with a maximum of one bridge tap of any length A maximum of 50 m 162 5 ft of 22 AWG 0 7mm quad cable may also be used Release 3 3 Specifications CO Trunk Loop The system operates with CO Trunks up to a maximum of 1600 ohms loop resistance CO Trunk Seizure The nominal seizure resistance is 265 ohms at 20 mA CO Trunk Resistance The on hook dc input resistance of the LS trunks is not less than 5M ohms Transmission Characteristics Compliance The transmission characteristics for the North American and Latin American variants comply with ANSI EIA TIA 464 C Requirements for Private Branch Exchange PBX Switching Equipment TIA 912 Voice Gateway Transmission Requirements
155. e 3 3 157 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install the SUPERSET HUB 158 Overview of the SUPERSET Hub Installation To install the SUPERSET HUB 1 Install the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier in the Peripheral Cabinet 2 Install the SUPERSET HUB unit The supplied mounting brackets allow you to install the unit in an equipment rack or to mount the unit on a wall Once you have completed these steps you can proceed to Installing a DSU Node or return to System Installation Overview Notes When installing the SUPERSET HUB in an enclosed rack you MUST provide adequate ventilation for example fans to ensure that the maximum ambient temperature inside the rack does not exceed 40 C When mounting the SUPERSET HUB in a rack you should ensure that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to any uneven mechanical loading When using the SUPERSET HUB in a rack you should consider the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of circuits might have on over current protection and supply wiring When addressing this concern consider the SUPERSET HUB s ratings label You can upgrade or replace the Fiber Interface Module in a SUPERSET HUB WARNING This product uses a Class 1 LED Fiber optic sources emit infrared radiation This radiation is invisible to the human eye and can damage the retina NEVER look directly into the end of a fiber optic cable which you suspect is energiz
156. e UK only Feature NA Germany China UK Int l MC320 Card BD BE for CH CG CD for ONS CE Variants ONS line line card EB card EA for for ONS ONS CLASS CLIP CLASS CLIP line card line card PCM Coding p law A law A law A law A law External Loop 600 ohms 850 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms Resistance 23mA see Note 1 External Wire 400 ohms 650 ohms 400 ohms 400 ohms 400 ohms Resistance see Note 2 Power BD 9 09 W 9 64 W 9 82 W 9 82 W 9 82 W Consumption BE 9 82W Message Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Waiting see Note 4 Calibrated No Yes Yes Yes Yes Flash Nominal 80Vrms 020 65Vrms 25 80Vrms 25 80Vrms 25 80Vrms 25 Ringing Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Voltage Nominal Trip 27 30 Vdc 27 27 Vdc 27 Vdc Battery Silent Interval External Loop 3800 3700 m 3700 m 3700 m Length 12350 ft 12025 ft 12025 ft 12025 ft 22 AWG 23 1500 m IWG 4875 ft 26 AWG 27 IWG International Caribbean Cuba Europe Middle East and Africa Notes used ring lead 1 Stations whose line loop resistances range between 400 and 1600 ohms must terminate on an OPS line card 2 External wire resistance measurements are based on the assumption that a 200 ohm set was 3 The German variant also provides impedance matching fixed and variable gains as well as Tip and Ring protection with selectable fuse or EMI choke option 4 The message waiting circuit for the
157. e Unit Dimensions 89 Digital Service Unit Environment 89 Digital Service Unit Power 90 Digital Service Unit 91 Telephone Power Options 104 Telephone Power Sources 104 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant 104 PowerDsine In line Power Unit 105 Release 3 3 Table of Contents Chapter 3 Installing Installing wie eee us El S ERR 111 Required Components etos d ee ae uQ Ere a a naka 111 Installation Site 111 Parts and Equipment siae VR sam uama ated 112 Information and Services 112 POWER 2 az az ege wer eet bedient eo ke doin 113 Uninterruptible Power Supply 113 System Installation Overview 114 Installation Planner oerte etae edo RR air 114 Capacity DEEP AG Sa E eng 117 Install the 3300 Controller 120 Install the Hard Drive
158. e User Guide Symptom Resolution 3300 In Line Power Unit is plugged to main AC inlet but does not power up Verify the use of a correct and functional AC power cord including good and solid ground connection Verify that the AC inlet is supplying power test with a different device and that the voltage is between 100Vac to 264VAC 50Hz to 60Hz Re connect the 3300 In Line Power Unit to the AC inlet and verify LEDs power up sequence 3300 In Line Power Unit is plugged in and running but the fans are not working Verify that all fan openings in the case are clear of any air blocking materials Iffans are not working there may be an internal power supply fault 3300 In Line Power Unit operates but the AC LED is off Ifboth internal fans are working i e air flows out of the case or can be heard there is a possible internal circuitry fault Iffans are not working there may be an internal power supply fault 3300 In Line Power Unit has powered up and the Alarm LED remains lit Establish whether the Power On Self Test POST sequence is as listed or not Ifthe LEDs light up in the correct sequence the 3300 In Line Power Unit is fully operational Ifthe Alarm LED remains lit following the POST sequence the 3300 In Line Power Unit POST detected an internal fault Contact your local dealer The Power Active LED is lit but one of the end devices does not operate Verify that the Power A
159. e the cover System ID Module Placement on 100 User System Power Supply IP0474 212 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Peripheral Node FRUs Power Down the Peripheral Unit To power down a Peripheral Unit 1 Remove the front panels 2 Switch off the power converter 3 Setthe power switch on the rear of the node to 0 OFF 4 Unplug the external power cord at the rear of the node Power Up the Peripheral Unit To power up a Peripheral Unit 1 Ensure the voltage selector switch is set to the required setting for your country 2 Connect the power cord at the rear of the unit to the external AC power source 3 Set the power switch on the rear of the node to I ON 4 Set the switch on the power converter faceplate to l ON Remove a Front Panel To remove a front panel from the DSU or Peripheral Unit 1 Insert a screwdriver in the slot on the right side of the front grill and pry it open 2 Loosen the two screws on the front cover and lift the cover up and away from the cabinet Replace a Front Panel To replace a front panel in a DSU or Peripheral Unit 1 Align the front panel screws with the holes in the cabinet and tighten the two screws 2 Insert the left front grill into the slot and snap it closed Remove a Circuit Card To remove a DSU or Peripheral Unit circuit card CAUTION Wear an anti static wrist strap whenever you handle circuit cards 1 Enter BUSY lt PLID of
160. ectivity through an RJ 45 patch panel and Fibre Interface Module FIM connection to the host peripheral cabinet At the peripheral cabinet a carrier module provides the connection for the FIM and interfaces back into the system The SUPERSET HUB may be rack mounted or wall mounted Release 3 3 Specifications Release 3 3 87 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Digital Service Unit Digital Service Unit Components A DSU cabinet holds up to four DSU cards and two FIMs The DSU cards provide digital trunk interfaces for public or private network access and specialized digital functions such as messaging expanded conference and ISDN service The FIMs support the transmission of voice and data signals between nodes DSU NODE DSU FRONT DSU BACK POWER gt s lt POWER SWITCH SUPPLY e Qe MAINTENANCE TERMINAL PORTS INTERFACE ASSEMBLIES DSUS SLIDING DOOR FOR FIBER OPTIC FIBER INTERFACE MODULE CANIER BB1141 The DSU cabinet consists of the following components Cabinet Frame The DSU cabinet is separated into two shelves Shelf 1 is located at the bottom of the cabinet and Shelf 2 is located at the top of the cabinet both shelves are at the front of the cabinet Shelf 1 consists of slots 1 to 6 and contains 2 FIMs and 4 DSUs Shelf 2 consists of two Peripheral Resource Cards PRCs Power Supply The 200 Watt AC power supply provides power for the cabinet The power supply fan cools
161. ed by a fiber optic source When working with raw fiber optic cable be aware of fiber ends and slivers which can puncture the skin and cause irritation Install the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier To install the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier Attach an anti static wrist strap Unpack the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged Remove the Peripheral Cabinet front and rear panels Slide the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier part way into the first available slot from the right Ov d ode Remove the black plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable connectors and from the connector ferrules on the faceplate of the FIM 6 Connectthe fiber optic cables to the connectors on the FIM via the fiber optic access port on the rear of the cabinet Note The fiber optic cable connectors have a small key that Release 3 3 Installing 10 you must align with a slot on the FIM connectors Lock each connector into position by pushing its metal collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector Push the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier fully into the slot and secure it with the card latch Remove the anti static wrist strap Route the fiber optic cables from the Peripheral Cabinet to the SUPERSET HUB Replace the Peripheral Cabinet front and rear panels Note For more information see Fiber Interface Module FIM Install the SUPERSET HUB To installthe SUPERSET HUB unit 1 2 Attach the rubber feet t
162. ed to begin and terminate the call setup process Line signaling features in IMAT allow you to program up to four bits to define the incoming and outgoing tone patterns for the following line commands Idle Seize Seize Ack Release 3 3 99 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 100 Answer Clear Backward Clear Forward Blocking Register Signaling In the R2 protocol register signaling is used during the call setup process to exchange information about the calling and called party numbers and the calling party category You can use IMAT to define any of the specific tones used in R2 register signaling R2 register signals are defined as either forward or backward signals Forward or outgoing signals are generated by the originator of a call Backward or incoming signals are generated by the terminating end of a call Forward and backward signals are grouped into the categories shown in the following table R2 Signaling Signal direction Event Function Group Forward outgoing Group Transmits digit information Group ll Transmits the category of the calling party such as a coin box and calling line identification Backward incoming Group A Acknowledges Group signals and requests digit information and the category and identification of the calling party Group B Acknowledges Group II signals and transmits status information about the called party such as busy Group C Ack
163. ed to the Peripheral Unit while the Fiber Interface Module is removed P WON Power down the node Remove the front panels Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Ifyou need more room remove the power converter and the PSC Disconnect the fiber cables from the FIM Place dust caps on the fiber cable connectors and on the FIM connectors Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Remove the cable by sliding it through the cable port at the rear of the cabinet 6 Pull the FIM out gently from slot 17 unplugging it from the backplane Install a FIM To install a FIM in a Peripheral Unit WARNING Power must not be applied to the Peripheral Unit during the installation of the Fiber Interface Module Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the FIM and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged Slide the FIM into the bottom of slot 17 until it connects with the backplane firmly Fasten the FIM in place with the two screws provided or the latch on the card guides Attach the FIM cable by following the steps in Connect the Fiber Optic Cable If the PSC and power converter were removed replace them at this time Power up the node Ur P O NS Replace the front panels Install a Peripheral Switch Controller Card PSC To replace a peripheral switch controller card CAUTION This procedure takes the peripheral devices connected to the node out of service CA
164. ephones 48 ONS telephones and 25 DNI telephones on a peripheral unit The 250 user 3300 ICP will support one of the following maximum configurations 250 IP telephones and 96 ONS telephones with no peripheral unit support 250 IP telephones and a 192 port peripheral unit with a DTMF card installed acombination of IP ONS and DNI telephones for example 100 IP telephones 96 ONS telephones and 100 DNI telephones on a peripheral unit A 700 User Controller will support one of the following maximum configurations 700 IP telephones and 96 ONS telephones with no peripheral unit support 7001P telephones 96 ONS telephones connected via ASUs and three 192 port peripheral units with a DTMF card installed The following table gives the maximum capacities available Note The controller will not support all of these capacities at the same time Refer to your Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for specific information on how to configure a 3300 ICP system Hardware Capacity 700 User 250 User 100 User Parameter Name Controllers Controller Compression Channels for TDM IP 64 32 DTMF Receivers 128 128 E2T Channels 128 64 Tone Detector Circuits 32 32 Tone Generators 128 128 Voicemail Ports 30 30 Dual FIMs 1 250 User Controller 1 2 700 User Controller NSUS without chaining 4 2 NSUs with chaining 8 4 Peripheral Unit direct connection 4 1 Peripher
165. er exceeds Power is disconnected the blinking Orange Blinking pre defined power budget port Main Power Status Indications AC LED Green AC LED State Main Power Status Meaning Off Main internal power supply unit is Main voltage is under 12v unplugged or faulty On Main power supply unit is plugged amp Main voltage is 42v to 57v under normal operating conditions Green Blinking Main power supply unit voltage Main voltage is 38v to 42v or Port s Green LED on exceeds specified limits 57v to 59v Port s power enabled Green Blinking Main power supply unit voltage Main voltage is under 38v or Port s Green LED off exceeds specified limits above 57v Port s power disabled Unit Status Indications Alarm LED Orange Alarm LED State Meaning Off Built in Self Test passed On Built in Self Test failed Blinking S W load failure Reinstall S W Troubleshooting This section provides a symptom and resolution sequence in order to assist in troubleshooting minor operating problems If you encounter problems Ensure power is applied to the 3300 In Line Power Unit Ensure a crossover type Ethernet cable is not used Ensure input Ethernet cable is connected to the Data In port Ensure output Ethernet cable is connected to the Data amp Power Out port Ensure input and output cable pairs are attached to corresponding ports Release 3 3 243 3300 ICP Hardwar
166. eral Cabinets for views of the power system components At the Peripheral Unit the power entry point is one 250 V removable fuse In 120 Vac systems this fuse must be a 10 A slow blow fuse In 240 Vac systems the fuse must be a 5A slow blow fuse Peripheral Unit Cards DID Loop Tie trunk card The Direct Inward Dialing Loop Tie DID LT trunk card can ter minate up to four DID and or Loop Tie trunks DNI line card The Digital Network Interface DNI line card provide 16 circuits to interface with Mitel digital telephones and consoles DTMF Receiver The DTMF receiver card provides 16 circuits to support DTMF telephone keypads and end to end signaling equipment E amp M trunk card The Ear and Mouth E amp M trunk card provides four circuits to interface E amp M Trunks to the system Fiber Interface Module The FIM with 16 circuits provides for the interface with the 3300 ICP Controller LS GS trunk card The Loop Start Ground Start LS GS trunk card can terminate eight analog CO trunks Release 3 3 75 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 76 ONSIine card and ONS CLASS CLIP line card On Premises ONS line card and the ONS Custom LocalArea Signaling Service CLASS Caller Line Identification Presentation CLIP line card provides 16 circuits for industry standard rotary dial and DTMF telephones OPS line card The Off Premises OPS line card provides eight circuits for industry stan dard telephones where the e
167. erface cards as they appear on J1 through J8 The following abbreviations are used in the tables ONS L C ONS line card and ONS CLASS CLIP line card OPS L C OPS line card LS GS Trunk Loop Start Ground Start Trunk card E amp M Trunk E amp M trunk card DID LT Trunk direct inward dialing loop tie trunk card DID 2 Trunk direct inward dialing DNI L C digital network interface line card Tables for Card Slots 1 through 12 follow Card Slot 1 Card Slot 1 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane pin Code ONSLC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk DMCC Plugs 26 W BL 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1 BL WMR 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 27 W O 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 2 O W 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 28 W G 3 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 3 G W 3R 2R 2R 156 2R 2R 3R 29 W BR 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 4 BR WAR 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 30 W S 5T 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P1 5 SAN 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 31 R BL 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2 1 6T 6 BL R 6R 3MWA 3R MR 2R1 6R 32 R O 7 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 7 O R 7R 4R 4R 256 4R 7R 33 R G 8 4MWB 4T MR 2 8T 8 G R 8R 4MWA 4R MR 25 8R Release 3 3 145 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 146 Card Slot 1 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane Pin Code ONSLC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk UNIES Plugs 26 W BL 9 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 1
168. ersal ASU only Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Tip 1 5 Ring 2 2 Ring 1 6 Ring 1 1 3 Tip 1 1 7 Tip 1 2 4 Tip 2 8 Ring 1 2 Note The paging port employs a single standard 8 pin modular RJ 45 jack located on the rear panel Each paging port has a tip ring pair for audio and a second tip ring pair designated tip1 ring1 contact closures for zone control ONS Line Specifications ONS Line Features ASU The ONS line circuit has the following features Maximum of 600 Ohm external loop drive capability This equates to approximately one mile of loop range over 26 gauge cable terminated by a 150 Ohm set Longer loops are supported but with the characteristics as described by the next bullet item Release 3 3 67 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 68 Constant current design with the loop current set at 25mA If the loop range extends pass 600 Ohm this circuit will revert to a voltage feed of approximately 2xVdc design dependant parameter between 22 26 Vdc The circuit remains active and the loop current will be dependant on the external loop impedance Supports a Ringing Equivalent Number REN of Capable of on hook transmission Used in conjunction with a centralized resource to de liver calling line ID Positive disconnect removal of battery from the ring lead Battery reversal UK LA EU variants only used for CLID Ground button detection Message waiting indication
169. et line WARNING When power is to be supplied from the Cisco equipment to the Mitel desktop appliance the Ethernet cable must run directly from the Cisco equipment supplying the power to the 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant The dongle will be directly connected to the Mitel desktop appliance WARNING When the 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant is used equipment that cannot support 48 volts shall not be connected to the dongle The dongle is specifically developed to interconnect between the Mitel desktop appliance and the Cisco power equipment Release 3 3 Specifications Cisco Switches Cisco end span power data hubs include the Catalyst 3500 4000 and 6000 The Cisco WS PWR PANEL is a mid span power hub These hubs each have the capability to power the following Mitel IP Phones 5001 IP Phone 5005 IP Phone 5010 IP Phone 5020 IP Phone and 5140 IP Appliance The WS PWR PANEL is electrically located between a conventional data hub and the powered device This unit passes through the data pairs from the data hub to the terminal device while inserting power on the spare pairs 4 5 and 7 8 Before enabling port power this unit generates a signal that a power ready device will loop back This signal is transmitted on the 7 8 pair and if this is looped back on the 4 5 pair the hub then assumes a power ready device is connected and enables power on that port The hub continuously probes the port with signal to ensure
170. ext in the Command line type dr logfile 1 and click Submit Release 3 3 207 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 208 Field Replaceable Units Controller FRUs Remove the Cover Note Ensure that you have read the Safety Instructions before carrying out these procedures WARNING Before any servicing that requires the case to be removed the power to the system must be removed by disconnecting the system plug from the power supply All PSTN Network connections must also be removed before opening the case WARNING Servicing of this unit shall be performed by suitably qualified trained technicians who are fully aware of the safety requirements contained in the Hardware User Guide To remove the 3300 ICP Controller cover Turn off the power to the unit Disconnect all cables Remove the 3300 Controller from the rack and place it on a suitable work area Remove the front face plate this will clip off Turn the 3300 Controller over gently keeping the front panel facing forward Remove the two screws from the underside of the 3300 Controller NO S gto 0 me Turn the 3300 Controller the right side up and rotate until the back of the unit is facing forward 8 Remove the two screws from the back panel 9 Slide the cover forward until it catches then tilt the cover upward to remove it 10 Turn the 3300 Controller until the front panel is toward you Replace the Cover To replace the 3300 ICP cover 1 Turn t
171. for 64 compression channels One DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides Four DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users Eight DSP devices 21161 for 64 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 64 compression channels and additional voice mail ports to a 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis The old Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Remove and keep the Sys ID Module 3 Remove and keep the Hard Drive Release 3 3 185 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide The new Release 3 2 chassis Remove the cover Install the two DSP Modules Slot 3 and Slot 4 Install the Sys Id Module that you removed from the 3 0 3 1 chassis Install the Hard Drive that you removed from the 3 0 3 1 chassis wn gt Replace the cover 250 User System With 64 Compression Channels Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IPD473 Note Some controllers in release 3 0 h
172. from right to left correspond to DSU slots 3 1 2 to 3 1 5 or on an SX 2000 DSU node correspond to DSU slots 2 to 5 Remove the cover plate from the slot on the metal box by unscrewing the two screws that hold it in place Insert the CEPT Interface Assembly into the empty slot in the DSU box and plug it into the DIN connector in the back of the DSU box Align the screw holes on the CEPT Interface Assembly faceplate with the screw holes in the metal box and fasten the faceplate to the box Connectthe cables fromthe externalnetworktothe BNC connectors onthe CEPT Interface Assembly Remove the anti static strap from your wrist Install Wireless Devices 164 To install a wireless device 1 Symbol Technologies will complete a site survey 2 Symbol Technologies will install and configure the Air Access Points 3 4 Complete Programming on 3300 ICP Install the Symbol NetVision MINET Phone Administrator Tool on a Windows NT or Win dows 2000 PC Upgrade the Symbol phone firmware to use the MiNET protocol Refer to the Symbol NVP MINET Update Procedure located in the Hardware User Guide Configure the wireless phones using the Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool Note To migrate from a 3200 ICP or 3800 WAG the wireless network must use the Direct Sequencing D S Spread Spectrum using the 802 11b protocol The wireless phones must have new firmware downloaded Install Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Admin
173. generates strong magnetic fields that can corrupt data on hard disks or floppy disks e Reproducing machines Note If a reproducing or copying machine must be located in same room as the system ensure that itis more than 3 m 10 ft away from the system Ifthe machine is not equipped with a filtering system ensure that the room is ventilated by an exhaust fan Parts and Equipment In order to complete the installation you must supply the following items Item Application Computer connected to a LAN Configure and manage the system Main Distribution Frame MDF Connect 25 pair peripheral cables with lines and trunks 25 pair cable with male amphenol connectors AMP Champ or equivalent connectors 50 pin RS screw lock 90x tapered slide on hood Connect lines and trunks from the rear of the ASU to the MDF 3 category 5 cables with RJ 45 connector no longer than 100m Standard Ethernet cable to connect to a Layer 2 switch Ethernet crossover cable to connect the CIM ports Cable from the digital trunk NSU and the demarcation point has a different pinout Fiber optic cables Connect the 3300 Controller to digital trunks and NSUs terminate at the FIM ports ST type fiber connectors four 14 AWG 1 8 mm cable minimum Ground the NSU and ASU RJ 45 connector cable Provide connectivity between NSU and demarcation point UPS Power back up Equipment rack
174. ground applied to it DTMF Receiver Card The DTMF Receiver card is used to detect and decode dual tone multi frequency DTMF tone signaling from telephone keypads and end to end signaling equipment There are 12 DTMF receivers located on each peripheral switch controller If additional DTMF receivers are required the DTMF Receiver card provides 16 DTMF circuits The DTMF Receiver card connects to a Peripheral Interface card slot on the peripheral shelf via connectors J1 and J2 DTMF Receiver Card Specifications Variants Available A law UK u law Number of Circuits per Card 16 DTMF receivers Power Consumption 3 43 watts Features Provided DTMF digit decoding up to 16 DTMF Digits selectable line splitting function digital loopback control software driven status lamp Compliance Complies with North American and CCITT specifications for tones Operation The DTMF Receiver card incorporates 16 DTMF receiver circuits that detect and decode DTMF dial tones Basic data and timing required for the DTMF Receiver card are supplied through the peripheral backplane from the peripheral switch controller SUPERSET HUB 86 The SUPERSET HUB builds on the distributed system concept by delivering advanced digital telephony functionality for workgroup It allows SUPERSET telephones to be cost effectively provided where a distributed system would be too expensive The SUPERSET HUB provides DNIC conn
175. hannel Echo Canceller If you choose to add a second Echo Canceller the controller must be operating on version 3 2 software The 3 0 3 1 software does not support two 64 echo cancellers This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions Release 3 3 189 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 190 64 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To upgrade a 250 user system to a 700 user system with 64 channels of compression Remove the cover Install the new Dual FIM Modules slot 2 Install the new 21161 DSP Modules slot 7 slot 4 and slot 3 Install the 64 Echo Canceller Module slot 6 Replace the cover af wr gt 250 User System to 700 User System 64 Compression Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 DSP DSP 64 Channel 64 Channel for Telecom for Telecom Echo Canceller Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0481 700 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 700 User System Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add support for 32 compression channels This system uses the following existing modules One 300 MHz RTC Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs One 300 MHz E2T One
176. he 3300 Controller until the back panel is facing forward Lift the lock for the AC power cord and place the shell at an angle to hook onto the back of the unit Straighten and slide the cover forward as far as it will go Secure the shell by inserting and snugly securing the two screws on the back panel Rotate the 3300 Controller until the front panel is facing forward Turn the 3300 Controller gently upside down m Secure the screws on the bottom front of the unit Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 8 Turn the 3300 Controller right side up 9 Clip on the front face plate taking care not to damage the protruding FIM connectors 10 Reinstall the 3300 Controller into the rack if applicable 11 Reconnect all cables 12 Power on the unit Dual FIM Module CAUTION To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet being serviced and immediately place any item removed from a cabinet into an anti static bag CAUTION Do not drop screws or lock washers in the controller To remove a Dual FIM Module Remove the cover Remove the two Philips screws from the faceplate in slot MMC 2 Remove the faceplate Remove the screws and lock washers from the Dual FIM Module sP Oo cm Pull up on the module to remove it To install a Dual FIM Module 1 Remove the cover 2 Remove the two Philips screws from the faceplate in slot MMC
177. he Configuration Tool with the Variant as 3300 ICP Perform a Restore of the SX 2000 converted database onto the 3300 ICP An automatic validation operation occurs to determine if the restore can proceed Reboot the 3300 ICP Check the logs for any data restore failures see Note below Change the 3300 ICP system name through the System Administration Tool Note After the Restore and Reboot check the log file In the System Administration Tool click Maintenance and Diagnostics select Maintenance Commands and click All Type the following text in the Command line type dr logfile_1 and click Submit Upgrade 3200 ICP to 3300 ICP Software Only one 3200 ICP can be migrated to a 3300 ICP at a time Migration and Configuration cannot be performed in a single task or session using the 3300 Configuration Tool After migration configuration must be completed using System Administration Tool Data restoration automatically triggers data migration If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion may fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP Windows 2000 users should clear the browser cache Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Export the Name Number and PIN of each user with a Symbol phone to a csv file using the Telephone Directory Export Application in OPS Manager only do this if you are migrating a 3200 ICP that has Symbol Phones programmed that use Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Inst
178. he ONS line card is 40 milliseconds ONS CLASSICLIP Line Card The ONS CLASS CLIP line card supports the same functionality as the ONS line card but also provides CLASS CLIP functionality when enabled by the software The ONS CLASS line card is available in North America and the ONS CLIP line card is available in the UK The ONS CLASS CLIP line card installs in any Peripheral Interface card slot and is hot swappable Note Sending CLASS CLIP information to an ONS line card will not harm the card ONS CLASS Line Card Specifications North America The ONS CLASS line card NA supports ONS CLASS sets NA that meet the following specifications ANSI TIA EIA 716 Standard Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Type 1 Caller Identity Equipment Performance Requirements ANSI TIA EIA 777 Standard Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Type 2 Caller Identity Equipment Performance Requirements For more information on ONS CLASS CLIP line card specifications see ONS Line Card OPS Line Card The OPS line card connects to any Peripheral Interface card slot The OPS line card is a digital card intended to be used to interface up to eight outside telephone extensions with the system The card is meant to interface telephone extensions whose line loop resistance exceeds 400 ohms As such the OPS line card is used to connect external telephone systems whose loop resistance is anywhere from 400 to 1600 ohms external resis
179. he protocols supported by the interfaces are T1 PRI Q Sig DPNSS T1 D4 E1 PRI Q Sig DPNSS DASSII PRI variant DMS 250 DMS 100 4ESS NI 2 55 and Euro ISDN NETS5 Q SIG Protocol variant EURO STANDARD EURO NUMERIS EURO CAYMAN NI2 STANDARD NI2 5ESS NI2 GTD5 QSIG ISO QSIG ETSI EX Note Q SIG uses Master Slave All others use User Network T1 E1 running PRI or Q SIG will support XNET over PRI NFAS D Channel Backup and Min Max functionality 3300 Universal NSU DIP Switch Settings Hybrid Port DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Use Notes 1 Tx Ground Ground when down floating when up 2 Rx Ground Ground when down floating when up 3 Impedance selector 1 120 ohm enabled when down 4 Impedance selector 2 100 ohm enabled when down 5 Impedance selector 3 75 ohm enabled when down 6 LT NT selector Up for NT down for LT PRI T1 Mode Connector DIP Switch Settings 3 4 5 6 Impedance 1 Tx Gnd 2 Rx Gnd un 1 2 1 3 LT NT 100 Up Up Up Down Up Down E1 MF R2 Mode Connector DIP Switch Settings 1 2 3 4 5 E a Impedance Tx Rx 120 100 75 Em q Gnd Gnd ohm ohm ohm No 120 Up Up Down Up Up Up No 120 Up Up Down Up Up Down Yes 75 Note Note Up Up Down Up Yes 75 Note Note Up Up Down Down Note Site dependant normally Tx is grounded and Rx is not grounded but that depends on which remote connection is grounded
180. he two cables through to the front of the cabinet Route the cables along the base of the cabinet At the rear of the cabinet insert the dual 10Base T connector assembly into the 12th FIM slot Fasten the dual 10Base T connector assembly to the fiber carrier using the two screws that you removed in step 5 Connect the two Ethernet cables to the 8 position 8 pin connectors on the dual 10Base T connector assembly At the front of the cabinet connect the 10 Base T internal cable for plane A to port J5 on the faceplate of the Ethernet interface card in slot 1 1 3 Connect the 10 Base T internal cable for plane B to port J5 on the faceplate of the Ethernet interface card in slot 1 1 6 Reset the ETI cards using the RESET switch on the faceplate of each ETI card The RDY LED on the ETI cards turn on steady indicating that the ETI cards are receiving their software loads from OPS Manager DSU FRUs Power Down the DSU 1 2 3 To power down a DSU node Set the power switch on the rear of the node to 0 OFF Unplug the external power cord at the rear of the node Power Up the DSU To power up a DSU node 1 2 Connect the external power cord at the rear of the node Set the power switch on the rear of the node to I ON Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Basic Rate Interface BRI BRI Installation Overview Before you install the BRI card ensure that The configuration includes a CEPT Forma
181. iants to suit the length of each cable run Fiber Interface Module Specifications 9400 300 301 NA Approximate maximum fiber cable run length See Note 1 1km 0 62 miles 2 5 Power consumption Watts Number of fiber links per FIM 1 Tx 1 Rx Fiber connector type ST See Note 2 Electrical interface See Note 3 8 serial ST links Optical wavelength nm 820 Optical budget See Note 4 6 db Date rate Mbits second 16 384 Bit rate after encoding Mbaud 20 48 Fiber optic cable type 62 5 125 um Multimode Notes 1 The run length is the one way length of fiber optic cable between nodes 2 ST is a registered trademark of AT amp T 3 Some channels of the electrical interface are not available 4 The optical budget is the allowable loss through fiber optic cable splices and connectors The optical budget applies to the run length Release 3 3 79 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Operation The FIM has three functional sections a transmitter a receiver and a control section The transmitter section accepts data from the node in which it is installed The data is converted to byte interleaved format and a checksum is calculated The checksum byte is combined with the data and the frame synchronization information The frame is encoded as serial data and transmitted on the fiber The receiver section converts the incoming data to parallel format extra
182. ibution unit PDU into the power converter through the access cutout in the backplane 5 Replace the internal AC power cord access cover plate over the access cutout in the backplane and replace the two screws PERIPHERAL NODE REAR 140 INTERNALAC POWER CORE AC POWER CORD ACCESS COVER PLATE RARNA19 Release 3 3 Installing Install Peripheral Interface Cards To install the Peripheral Interface cards CAUTION To prevent static damage to electrical components ensure that the system is grounded before you install the cards Whenever you handle circuit cards wear an anti static strap 1 Installthe peripheral switch controller card in slot 16 2 Setthe E amp M Trunk Card settings and the OPS Line Card Message Waiting Switches in the Peripheral Unit Specifications section 3 Installthe Peripheral Interface cards Refer to Install a Circuit Card in Install Upgrades and FRUs for circuit card installation procedures Cable the Unit to the MDF Cable the lines and trunks from the Peripheral Unit to the Main Distribution Frame MDF by using the Peripheral Interface Cabling Tables About Peripheral Interface Cabling Peripheral equipment e g stations SUPERSET telephones trunks is connected to the relevant interface circuits of the system via a cross connect field Peripheral Interface cards situated in slots 1 through 12 are connected to the cross connect field by a maximum of eight 25 pai
183. ice Mail Ports 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four NSUs Note You may need to add a DSP resource to upgrade the 100 User System with any of the following 30 Voice Mail Ports Peripheral cabinet NSU 6500 Speech Enabled Applications See your Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for more information Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 30 VOICE MAIL PORTS Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Telecom Telecom IP0475 100 User System Add 32 Compression Channels 100 user system upgrade to add support for 32 channels of compression This system uses the following existing modules One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One 21161 based DSP Module for telecom support Add the following module One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides 4DSP devices for telecom functions for up to 100 users 4DSP devices for 32 channels of compression 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports Release 3 3 177 3300 IC
184. ided transfers data at 1 544 Mbps over T1 telephone trunks Setting the links for E1 or T1 operation You can set the links for either E1 or T1 mode by using the E1 T1 switches on the side ofthe card Release 3 3 93 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 94 Switch settings for E1 or T1 mode E1 T1 Switches Mode Channel 24 Switch 1 Switch 2 Link 1 Link 2 E1 mode compatible for connection to MSDN DS1 data not inverted open open trunks that have been externally converted from MSDN CEPT trunks T1 mode normal DS1 Formatter card operation data inverted closed closed Note If you set a link for E1 mode the data on channel 24 is not inverted The external carrier must map the channels to the CEPT link Connecting to MSDN CEPT Links E1 Mode Channel mapping is required to connect with CEPT links the external carrier must map the channels to the CEPT link If you set a link for E1 mode the data on channel 24 is not inverted Channel 24 of the E1 T1 051 link must be mapped to channel 16 of the CEPT E 1 link You must dedicate channels to either voice or data transmission You must also inform the carrier which channels are used for data transmission and which channels are used for voice transmission The carrier must program the voice channels for A law to m law conversion Data channels and the common channel signaling CCS channels must NOT be converted The datasets for the dedi
185. iguration Tool The Configuration Tool will convert the 3800 database to a 3300 database Change the Variant to 3300 ICP and change the IP Address if required Perform a Restore of the 3800 WAG converted database onto the 3300 ICP An automatic validation operation occurs to determine if the restore can proceed Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 7 Manually Reboot the 3300 ICP Check the logs for any data restore failures see Note below 8 Collect the telephone directory information from the 3300 ICP using the Telephone Direc tory Full Collect application in the Configuration Tool 9 Collect unused circuit information from the 3300 ICP using the Collect Unused Directory Circuits application in the Configuration Tool 10 Import the csv file that contains the Name Number and PIN information of each Symbol phone user using the Moves Adds and Changes application in the Configuration Tool 11 Change the 3300 ICP system name and the default usernames passwords using the System Administration Tool 12 Update the firmware in the Symbol NetVision phone Refer to the Symbol NVP II MiNET Update Procedure located in the Hardware User Guide 13 Complete the programming of the Symbol phone using the Symbol NetVision MINET Phone Administrator Tool Note After the Restore and Reboot check the log file In the System Administration Tool click Maintenance and Diagnostics select Maintenance Commands and click All Type the following t
186. in Designations Pin Color RJ21X RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ2FX RJ2HX Code 26 W BL T T T T T 1 BL W R R R 27 W O T E T1 E T1 2 OW R M R1 SG R1 28 W G T T E M E 3 G W R R SB SG 29 W BR T E T T M 4 BR W R M R SB 30 W S T T T1 E T 5 S W R R R1 SG R 31 R BL T E E M T1 6 BL R R M M SB R1 32 R O T T T T E 7 O R R R R R SG Release 3 3 143 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 144 Pin Color RJ21X RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ2FX RJ2HX Code 33 R G T E T1 E M 8 G R R M R1 SG SB 34 R BR T T E M T 9 BR R R R M SB R 35 R S T E T T T1 10 S R R M R R R1 36 BK BL T T T1 E E 11 BL BK R R R1 SG SG 37 BK O T E E M M 12 O BK R M M SB SB 38 BK G T T T T T 13 G BK R R R R R 39 BK BR T E T1 E T1 14 BR BK R M R1 SG R1 40 BK S T T E M E 15 S BK R R M SB 56 41 Y BL T E T T M 16 BL Y R M R R SB 42 Y O T T T1 E T 17 R R R1 SG R 43 YIG T E E M T1 18 G Y R M M SB R1 44 Y BR T T T T E 19 BR Y R R R R SG 45 YIS T E T1 E M 20 S Y R M R1 SG SB 46 V BL T T E M T 21 BL V R R M SB R 47 VIO T E T T T1 22 ON R M R R R1 48 VIG T T T1 E E 23 GN R R R1 SG 56 49 VIBR T E E M M 24 BR V R M M SB SB 50 VIS E SPARE H 25 S V m SPARE m Release 3 3 Installing Card Connections to Cross Connect Field The following tables show the pin out signals of the int
187. in bold Conference Card The Conference card provides 64 channels of conference capability No more than five parties are allowed per conference The Conference card is optional because conference capability is provided on the system Controller If the Conference card is installed the conference capability on the Controller is superseded Conference Card Specifications Conference Channels 64 Power Consumption 15 6 Watts Features Provided Flexible assignment for up to 64 channels of conference Up to five conferees per conference Conferencing of both symmetrical and asymmetrical terminals Conference control memory provided by three DX chip output links On board RAM for accumulator buffer On board RAM for frame buffer 128 K On board attenuation control by ROM A law and p law PCM translation via ROM lookup Release 3 3 Specifications Operation The Conference card allows conferences on circuit switch channels Channel conference is accomplished by generating a sum of all data from all channels in a conference and returning this sum to any given channel minus the portion produced in that channel Both symmetrical and asymmetrical terminals are supported for conference purposes by the Conference card Symmetrical terminals have the same loss requirements for transmit receive Asymmetrical terminals have different loss requirements for transmit than receive i e analog tie trunk When asymmetricala
188. indows takes the information from a Mitel file and creates the driver called NT Direct Connection Refer to detailed installation and configuration instructions for Direct Connection Device Driver for Windows 95 and Windows 98 Direct Connection Device Driver for Windows 2000 Professional Driver for Windows 95 and Windows 98 To install and configure the Direct Connection Device Driver for Windows 95 or Windows 98 On the Start menu point to Settings and then click Control Panel Double click the Modems icon In the Modem Properties window click Add In the Install New Modem screen click Other dee Select Don t detect my modem l will select from a list Click Next Release 3 3 Installing 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Click Have Disk Type c Program FilesWitelmat in the Copy manufacturer s files from field and click OK the Install from Disk window click OK Click Next to select the NT Direct Connection Select COM 1 or COM 2 and then click Next Click Finish In the Modem Properties window select NT Direct Connection then click Properties Setthe following parameters Maximum speed 38400 Check only connect at this speed Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 Mode auto answer In the Advanced Settings window do the following for a direct connect cable Turn off error control Turn off flow control Click OK and close the Control Panel wind
189. inuous Message Notification 440 520 4401440 0 75 on 0 75 off x 2 then 520 0 2 on 0 75 off x 1 then 440 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat forever Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 1400 0 3 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 440 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Ringback 440 1 5 on 3 5 off repeat Special Busy 440 0 35 on 0 35 off repeat Special Ringback 440 0 4 on 0 2 off 0 4 on 2 0 off repeat Transfer Dial 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Busy 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Dial 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Camp on 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Conference 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Confirmation 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Feature Active Dial 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Interrupted Dial 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Message Notification 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 23 23 18 21 18 18 16 20 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Modem Answer 24 24 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 23 23 18 21 18 18 16 20 Paging 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Reorder 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Ringback 20 20 15 18 15 15 13 17 Page 1 of 2 22 Release 3 3 Specifications
190. ions ONS Ringing Parameters ASU Ringing Parameters for NA LA Parameters for UKIEU Voltage 65 Vrms sinewave superimposed 65 Vrms sinewave superimposed onto 48Vdc onto 48Vdc Frequency 20Hz 25Hz Trip Battery Silent interval 30Vdc 30Vdc Ring Interval 50Vdc 50Vdc Number of bridged ringers 3 3 Max bridged capacitance 3uF 15kOhms 3uF 15Kohms Ring Trip detect time HW detector response 100ms HW ring trip overrides application of ringing signal HW detector response 100ms HW ring trip overrides application of ringing signal SW ring trip response time Within 50ms of switch hook detect Within 50ms of switch hook detect ONS Message Waiting Parameters ASU Message Waiting Parameters for NA LA Parameters for UK EU Voltage 115Vdc 5V dc 115Vdc 5V dc Source Impedance Between 2k and 4K Between 2k and 4K MSW trip SW control interlocks with application of ringing SW control interlocks with application of ringing Flash Rate Cadenced SW controlled 300ms Cadenced SW controlled 300ms on 1500ms off cont on 1500ms off cont LS Trunk Specifications LS Trunk Features 3300 Universal ASU only Four Loop Start LS trunk circuits are supported by the 3300 Universal ASU with the following features Loop Start trunk capability only 50Hz meter pulse detection over a second T R pair is supported
191. istrator Tool The tool is found on the 3300 ICP software CD and must be installed on a PC that is running Windows NT or Windows 2000 To install the tool Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 1 2 Click PartyWireless Administration Tool MiNET lt xxx gt exe 3 4 Click Close Click UnZip to place files in C temp symbol Release 3 3 Installing 5 6 T Open the C temp symbol folder Click setup exe Follow the instructions in the install wizard Install 3300 ICP as a Stand alone IP Gateway The 3300 ICP can be used as an IP Gateway providing the functionality of both IP and Wireless MiNET protocols adjunct to a legacy or third party PBX connected over DPNSS or Q Sig trunks Before you Begin Ensure that Symbol Technologies have installed and configured the Air Access Points Ensure you have the ESS ID numbers of the Air Access Points Install the Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool a Windows NT or Win dows 2000 PC To install as a stand alone system 1 Install the 3300 ICP Controller Install the System ID Module 3 Connect power to the 3300 Controller The controller will come up in 15 to 20 minutes with factory installed software To check the connections between the 3300 Controller and the PC PING the 3300 Controller IP address FTP to the 3300 Controller IP address Go to the 3300 Controller URL address e g http 192 168 1 2 Launch browser to l
192. k 425 1 on 4 off repeat Transfer Dial 425 0 1 on 01 off 0 1 on 0 7 off repeat Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Release 3 3 23 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Busy 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Dial 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Camp on 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Conference 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Confirmation 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 External Camp on 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Feature Active Dial 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Interrupted Dial 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Message Notification 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Modem Answer 24 24 21 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 27 27 24 22 25 22 22 20 24 Paging 21 21 18 16 19 16 16 14 18 Reorder 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Ringback 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Special Busy 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Special Ringback 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Transfer Dial 15 15 12 10 13 10 10 8 12 Voice Mail 21 21 18 16 19 16 16 14 18 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets
193. l the cabinet Rear Panel The following switches and connectors are located on the rear panel of the cabinet A power on off switch Afuse to protect the line lead on the input power AC systems or circuit breaker DC systems A 3 conductor male receptacle to connect AC input power A sliding door for the Tx and Rx fiber optic cables AnRS 232 Maintenance Terminal port for remote access remote maintenance con nections will only work on the master cabinet of a peripheral pair Nine 25 pair male filtered Amphenol connectors are located on the rear panel All lines and trunks from the main distribution frame connect to the eight horizontally positioned connectors using 25 pair cable The single vertically positioned 25 pair D phone connector provides power and contact closure to an optional external system fail transfer unit A 3 conductor female plug is recessed in the rear panel behind a small cover plate AC systems only The plug connects to the power connector on the AC Power converter Release 3 3 73 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 74 A ground connector Peripheral Unit Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 19 inches 48 0 cm Width 18 inches 45 8 cm Depth 16 5 inches 42 0 cm Weight 95 Ibs 43 2 kg Peripheral Unit Environment Storage Environment Condition Specification Temperature 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C Humidity 5 95 Relative Humidity
194. larm Minor On Red Voice mail disk space is at 90 Off No alarm Release 3 3 237 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 238 Copper Interface Module LEDs CIM LED State Meaning for Local Upper and Remote and Lower CIM Off No Power Flashing Link established but not configured On Communication Link established and configured 10 100 Base TX MDI X Ethernet LEDs Note Ethernet Port 2 on the 3300 100 Controller does not currently function and should NOT be used for any purpose LED State Color Meaning Normal mode Top On Yellow Link activity Top On Red Collision Bottom On Green Link integrity Bottom Off No link integrity Top On Yellow Full Duplex Top On Red ERR LED mode switch pressed Bottom On Green 100 Mbps Bottom Off 10 Mbps System Hardware Profile To check the hardware that is installed in the controller 1 Click System Hardware Profile from the Maintenance and Diagnostic menu 2 Select one of the following Compute Cards for information on the E2T or RTC cards Modules for information on the MMC cards Dual FIMs Echo Cancellers DSPs Troubleshoot the 3300 Universal NSU Universal NSU Link Status LED State Meaning LAN flashing LAN activity MS message system solid green message link open to the system off message link not open to the system are walking may be downloading when LO
195. lcore You must configure both links as either T1 orE1 on the same PRI Gateway For more information on programming multiple ISDN variants and configurations refer to the IMAT online Help Note Options must be purchased from MITEL to support Network side and or Q SIG The following protocols support User side configurations e A4ESS Custom T1 only SESS NI2 only calling name delivery NI99 SR4619 spec T1 only AT amp T DMS 100 Nortel Custom T1 only DMS 250 Nortel Custom T1 only GTD5 2 Calling name delivery NI99 SR4619 spec T1 only BellCore NI2 Calling name delivery NI99 SR4619 spec 1 only Siemens Q SIG ETSI and ISO Standard T1 ISO Standard Euro ISDN E1 only Release 3 3 Specifications The following protocols support Network side configurations 4ESS Custom T1 only DMS 100 Nortel Custom T1 only DMS 250 Nortel Custom T1 only BellCore NI2 Calling name delivery NI99 SR4619 spec T1 only Siemens Q SIG E1 ETSI and ISO Standard T1 ISO Standard Euro ISDN E1 only R2 Card The R2 card is a protocol converter that allows the 300 ICP system to access an R2 National Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN with MF R2 digital trunk signaling The card also receives and processes Calling Line Identification CLI and allows the information to be displayed on the user s telephone display screen The R2
196. ller Cross over DX connections CIM 8 pin Mod jack 4 2in 100 Txlink Rxlink Pinout is based on Controller all differential pairs standard IT cable pairs Alarm Drive DB9 1 Contact closures Critical DB9 connection female Major Minor alarms connection Release 3 3 Specifications 3300 Network Services Units Mitel Networks 3300 Universal NSU Components Front panel RS 232 serial port DB9 connector to a PC for maintenance purposes such as field installation database upgrade access to logs and modem connection for remote access Ethernet port RJ 45 connector for future use Faceplate LEDs Miscellaneous Link Status and Message Link Controlled FIM port for fiber connection to the 3300 Controller Two CIM ports Reset pin 2320 Universal NSU Rear panel DIP switch up 1 position for FIM connection down 2 for CIM connection Two 1 E1 ports RJ 45 connectors for T1 RJ 45 or ground and coax for E1 for network connection Two hybrid port status LEDs Two hybrid port DIP switch complexes Power connector Protective ground to ground the chassis 0000000000000000000 969665060060 2525 Q 9o000000Q00000QC OOOOOC 1 4 s IP0214 Release 3 3 57 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 58 3300 Universal NSU Protocols The 3300 Universal NSU provides T1 or E1 connectivity and supports up to two links per unit T
197. ller border screws the four larger screws secure the hard drive to the backing plate Replace the hard drive Return power to the unit but do not connect to the network Reset the IP Address of the RTC through the RS232 port to the default 192 168 1 2 Set the IP Address of the source PC to match the RTC IP scheme Connect the PC NIC to the 3300 ICP Configure the FTP server for the install process From the software CD ROM select INSTALL 12 13 14 15 16 17 Reboot the system Login to the System Administration Tool Restore a backup Reset the RTC IP Address to the customer setting Connect to the network Reset the system Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs System ID Module 250 User and 700 User Controllers To remove and replace the System ID Module in the 250 User and 700 User Controllers 1 Remove the cover 2 Remove the module from the board The module is located between Slot 1 the Dual FIM and Slot 8 the DSP 3 Replace the module between Slot 1 and Slot 8 4 Replace the cover Release 3 3 211 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide System ID Module Placement on 250 User and 700 User Systems ui a 3 a IP0421 100 User Controller To remove and replace the System ID Module in the 100 User Controller Remove the cover Remove the module from the board The module is located behind Slot 2 Replace the module behind Slot 2 FON gt Replac
198. ls of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity to NSUs No Peripheral Shelves can be connected in this configuration without adding more DSP resources unless there are no ASU connections Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 30 VOICE MAIL PORTS AND 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Telecom Telecom 0476 Release 3 3 43 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3300 Controller 250 and 700 Controller Mitel Networks TM 3300 250 and 700 Controller Components Front Panel Remote Alarm port DB 9 connector Two RS 232 ports DB 9 connectors Printer and Maintenance Dual FIM ports to support the NSUs Network Services Units or a Peripheral Unit 12 switch provides four 10 100 Ethernet connections via RJ 45 8 CAT5 cross over cable Four 2 MB CIM copper interface module ports are used to connect to the ASUs Analog Services Units with cross over Category 5 cable LEDs showing the status of the FIM fiber interface module CIM copper interface mod ule and Alarm Status Rear Panel Power connector Protective ground to ground the chassis IP0213 Internal Components 20 GB EIDE hard drive 256 Mbytes of memory on the 300 MHz RTC that provides main control Stratum 3 clock
199. lue Router Default Gateway 003 IP Address Options for WEB devices DNS Server 006 IP Address DNS Domain Name 015 ASCII String Options for 3300 E2T TFTP Server hostname or IP 066 ASCII String typically the IP address of the controller RTC TFTP BootFile 067 ASCII String sysro E2T8260 Options for IP Phones Mitel IP Phone DHCP server 130 ASCII String MITEL IP PHONE IP Phone TFTP Server 128 IP Address typically the IP address of the controller RTC 3300 ICP RTC IP Address 129 IP Address not applicable on the 100 user controller VLAN ID 132 Hex Long 32 bit e g Ox2 word VLAN Priority 133 Hex Long 32 bit 0x6 word IP Phone MAC Information IP Set Registration Code See System Option Assignment IP Set Replacement Code Set Programming Guide User Name Location Set Type Number MAC Address optional Release 3 3 115 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 116 Set Programming Guide User Name Location Set Type Number MAC Address optional Release 3 3 Installing Capacity The 100 user 3300 ICP will support one of the following maximum configurations 100 IP telephones and 48 ONS telephones with no peripheral unit support acombination of IP ONS and DNI telephones for example 75 IP tel
200. m meets Class A limits as outlined in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J and complies with conducted emissions standards as outlined in BS800 Acoustic Emissions Maximum 50 dBA continuous 75 dB intermittent lt 10 duty cycle Static Discharge Withstands 50 discharges of each polarity through a 10 k resistor connected to a 60 pF capacitor charged to 20 kV and 20 discharges of each polarity through 500 ohm resistor connected to a 100 pF capacitor charged to 10 kV Lightning Surge 2 5 kV peak with a maximum rise time of 2 us and minimum decay time of 10 us applied to power lead terminals and 800 V peak with a maximum rise time of 10 ms and minimum decay time of 560 ms applied to outside plant interface terminals Induction Normal 50 Vrms at 60 Hz open circuit longitudinal mode Tip and Ring to ground Power line Faults and Line Crosses Abnormal 600 Vrms between Tip and Ring or to ground Flammability Minimum oxygen index 28 as outlined in ASTM D2863 70 and ASTM D28664 74 meets all safety specifications for product type CSA UL and BT for use in office environment Conversion factors 1 watt is equal to 3 412 BTUs per hour 1 ton of refrigeration is equal to 12 000 BTUs per hour or 3 516 Kilowatts and 3 4 Kilowatt hour is equal to 1 ton of refrigeration Digital Service Unit Power Power Supply Operation 120 Vac 230 120 Vac Maximum AC power input Watts 78 W
201. m the middle of the panel The box holds up to four CEPT or DS1 Interface Assemblies CAUTION Do not connect any devices to the female power receptacle Digital Service Unit Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 19 inches 48 0 cm Width 9 inches 22 9 cm Depth 16 5 inches 42 0 cm Weight 40 Ibs 18 0 kg Digital Service Unit Environment Storage Environment Condition Specification Temperature 40 to 150 F 40 to 66 C Humidity 5 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Vibration 0 5 g 5 to 100 Hz any orthogonal axis 1 5 g 100 to 500 Hz any orthogonal axis Mechanical Stress One 20 3 cm 8 inch drop each edge and corner adjacent to the rest face unpackaged Horizontal Transportation One shock pulse applied on each face perpendicular to the direction of Impact Stress motion of the transporting vehicle the shock pulse is a half sine acceleration 30 g peak 20 ms duration Release 3 3 89 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Operational Environment Condition Specification Temperature 32 to122 F 0 to 50 C Humidity 5 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Maximum Heat Dissipation fully loaded see Note 266 BTUs per hour Air Flow 150 cubic feet per minute at maximum output of the fans Radiated Emissions The system meets Class A limits as outlined in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart J Conducted Emissions The syste
202. m uses the following existing modules One 300 MHz RTC 300 MHz E2T One 128 Channel Echo Canceller Two Dual FIMs Two DSP Modules 21061 21161 for telecom support And the following module Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 compression channels Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides Eight DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 700 users Four DSP devices 21161 for 64 channels of compression Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 30 Voice Mail Ports 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Four external FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 64 compression channels to a 700 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Install the DSP Module slot 3 3 Replace the cover 700 User System Add 64 Compression Channels Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 128 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0420 Note Some controllers in release 3 0 had the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 Release 3 3 193 3300 ICP Hardware User G
203. mination NT as the default There are two jumper positions for each circuit one for NT and one for Line side termination LT To set the card for LT remove the jumper blocks from the NT position and place them on the LT position The connections to and from the PRI card are made through an Interface Assembly mounted at the back of the DSU cabinet These connections include two T1 or E1 interfaces for network connection T1 RJ 45 connectors E1 RJ 45 or coaxial connectors 5 232 port DB9 connector for administration and debug an Ethernet port RJ 45 connector for future use PRI Card Specifications The following CO types and protocols are the only protocols supported by the ISDN PRI Card e 4ESS Custom T1 only 5ESS N1 2 only N13 Calling name delivery N199 SR4619 spec T1 only AT amp T DMS 100 Nortel Custom T1 only DMS 250 Nortel Custom T1 only GTD5 N12 N13 Calling name delivery N199 SR4619 spec T1 only BellCore N12 N13 Calling name delivery N199 5 4619 spec T1 only Siemens Q SIG ETSI and ISO Standard E1 and ISO Standard T1 Euro ISDN E1 only Release 3 3 Specifications Dual Port T1 PRI Universal T1 Card Features 1 544 Mbps primary rate 23B D connectivity 2 links B8ZS or AMI line coding Super Frame SF or Extended Super Frame EXF framing Generation and detection of the following status indications Loss of Signal LOS or
204. n port Data amp Power Out Ports Using a standard Category 5 6 or 6e straight through cable connect the cable leading to the end device to the corresponding Data amp Power Out port Note Be certain to connect correspondingly numbered Data In and Data amp Power Out ports Ethernet Switch Hub 3 5 EE ra z 2 3 m a E a Connecting Cables to End Devices The 3300 In Line Power Unit PD PH 4024 AC 48 contains proprietary line sensing capabilities that enable it to send power only to end devices that know how to receive power These end devices termed Power over LAN Enabled will receive power once connected the 3300 In Line Power Unit Note Mitel IP telephones powered by a 3300 In line Power Unit require a 3300 Phone Power adapter p n 57003121 at the set end to operate In order to safeguard devices that have not been enabled the 3300 In Line Power Unit will detect devices that are not enabled and therefore not send power It is important to note that 168 Release 3 3 Installing data continues to flow via the Category 5 6 or 6e cabling regardless of the status of the end device Prior to connecting end devices to the 3300 In Line Power Unit determine if 1 The end device is Power over LAN Enabled or not If the end device is not Power over LAN Enabled the end device may be safely connected However the port will supply no power and will function as a normal Ether
205. ncrease the backup time 13 Click Start Backup The system displays progress and eventually a back up complete message Note During a system backup the 5140 IP Appliance will be unable to access the following applications through the command keys Online Services Personal Directory Bookmarks and Speed Dials Timer The system takes approximately 1 2 an hour to 1 1 2 hours to back up an average sized database and approximately 4 hours to back up a large database 14 Click OK 15 Verify the presence of the backup file on the local drive 16 Use the following procedure to ensure that your ESM backup file contains your voice mail messages before proceeding with the software installation Change the backup file name to tar file for example May10 to May10 tar Use WinZip to open your renamed tar file Look for files with the name of 002Vxxxxxxx vox where xxxxxxx is a variable system generated alphanumeric string which are played and unplayed messages and 003msgxxxx vox where xxxx is the extension number which contain the status of messages belonging to that extension Installing 3 3 software upgrading 17 Insert the Mitel Networks 3300 ICP 3 3 software CD into the CD drive of the installer s PC 18 Runthe Setup exe program from the CD You see the Installation Wizard Welcome page 19 Click Next to continue 20 Read the License Agreement page and click Yes if you wish to continue 21 Ensure that New Ins
206. nd symmetricalterminals are connectedin the same conference call the Conference card attenuates the loss level of the lines to minimize distortion between the conference parties Echo a problem in multi party conferences is also attenuated filtered DS1 Formatter Card DS1 T1 Formatter Card The software is pre loaded on the DS1 T1 Formatter card and software upgrades can be performed in the field Note The lock latch for this card is DS1 T1 Il Formatter MC270CA After the card is installed and running LED behavior will indicate a download by flashing ina downward progression An Interface Assembly is required E1 T1 DS1 Formatter Card The E1 T1 DS1 Formatter card provides two interfaces Each interface controls a 24 channel serial link One channel channel 24 is dedicated to signaling and the remaining 23 channels traffic channels transmit PCM voice or data samples A dual DIP switch on the E1 T1 card allows you to set the links for either T1 mode or E1 mode In T1 mode the card operates as 051 Formatter card In E1 mode the data on channel 24 of each link is not inverted In an MSDN private network the links are compatible with externally converted CEPT E1 links E1 mode is only supported in MSDN applications Note The E1 T1 DS1 Formatter card does not provide direct connection to CEPT E1 links Card Specifications Channels Provided 46 traffic channels and 2 signaling channels Features Prov
207. nectors have a small key that must be aligned with a slot on the FIM connectors Lock each connector into position by pushing the metal collar forward and clipping it onto the FIM connector Release 3 3 Installing Peripheral Unit Grounding CAUTION Ensure that the grounding meets the requirements specified in the Safety Instructions These instructions are packaged with each system WARNING Danger to personnel and or equipment damage could result if the cabinet is not powered off To check the grounding 1 Ensure that the power switch S1 on the power distribution unit PDU is set to the off 0 position and that the switch on the power converter faceplate is set to the off 0 position 2 Attach the anti static wrist strap to your wrist 3 Slide the installed circuit cards forward slightly so that the card connectors are not in 10 11 contact with the cabinet backplane Leave the power converter installed Remove the anti static wrist strap Plug the external power cable from the AC commercial power supply into the power input plug on the power distribution unit PDU Disconnect the protective earth wire from the protective earth ground stud on the rear of the cabinet Using a digital multimeter measure the AC potential between the protective earth wire building ground and the protective earth ground stud A voltage reading of less than 1 VAC is acceptable To prevent damage to the multimete
208. nes as specified in EIA TIA 464 C Output Signaling The Mitel Networks 3300 ICP meets the output signaling requirements as specified in EIA TIA 464 C DTMF Output Signaling as specified by EIA TIA 464 C frequency deviation 1 percent tone duration greater than 40 ms interdigit time greater than 40 ms level low group greater than 10 dbm level high group greater than 8 dbm level low group and high group combined less than 2 db level third greater than 40 db frequency below dtmf signal twist less than 4 db Time Out Information The system is capable of responding to or providing the following supervisory conditions Switchhook flashes having a duration of between 160 ms and 1500 ms as programmed to activate Transfer Consultation Hold Add On features e Call transfer dial tone can be obtained by generating a calibrated flash This method is recognized internationally and is generated in one of three ways use aflash hook for telephones connected to ONS circuits Upper and lower detection thresholds for switchhook flash are programmable between 60 ms and 500 ms and between 60 ms and 1500 ms respectively use the calibrated flash button for equipped telephones Release 3 3 9 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide dial the digit 1 on an ordinary rotary telephone Station switchhook flashes of less than the maximum programmed switchhook flash time will not be repeated toward
209. net data port 2 The end device s power requirements are consistent with the 3300 In Line Power Unit voltage and power ratings To connect end devices to the 3300 In Line Power Unit 1 Connect a Category 5 6 or 6e cable to the end device directly if the device is Power over LAN Enabled 2 Connect the opposite end of the same cable to the RJ 45 wall outlet 3 Onthe front panel of the 3300 In Line Power Unit monitor the response of the correspond ing port LEDs If the Power Active LED lights up the 3300 In Line Power Unit has identified your end device as a Power over LAN Enabled device and the port is sending power Install the 3300 In Line Power Adapter The Mitel Networks 3300 Phone Power adapter p n 57003121 is required to enable certain Mitel Networks IP Phones to be powered from the Mitel Networks 3300 In Line Power Unit p n 57003131 To install the In Line Power Adapter 1 Connect the RJ 45 output male end of the power adapter to the IP Phone network connector located on the underside of the telephone 2 Connect the LAN cable male end to the power dongle RJ 45 input female end The Power Unit sensing the Power Adapter will apply 48VDC across pins 4 5 and 7 8 spare pair LAN cable to power the IP Phone Install 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant Install 3300 Power Dongle Cisco compliant The 3300 Power dongle p n 50002822 10 Pack is required to enable Mitel Networks IP Phones to be powere
210. nfigure the Java Plug in 14 Configure FTP Username and Password 15 Assign Domain Accounts 16 Configure IIS 5 settings 17 Copy the identitydb obj file to your local directory 18 Connect the 3300 Configuration Tool PC to the 3300 ICP Controller using both a serial connection and a network connection Note The installation information for the 3300 Configuration Tool is also available on the 3300 Configuration Tool software CD Install and Configure the Java Plug In Install the Java Plug in on the 3300 Configuration Tool PC from the following URL http servername opsclient where servername is the netbios name of the 3300 Configuration Tool platform After you have installed the plug in you must set the parameters as follows 1 From the Start menu point to Programs and click Java Plug in ControlPanel 2 Click Basic 3 Enterthe following parameter Network Access Unrestricted or Applet host do not select None 4 Use the default settings for the parameters in the Advanced and Proxies property sheets 5 Click Apply The 3300 Configuration Tool PC operating on Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Professional is connected to the 3300 Controller through a serial connection and a network connection The PC must be equipped with an Ethernet card an Ethernet cable a communications program a serial port use Hyperterminal default settings and a serial cable Program FTP User Account and Password Windows 2000 To prog
211. ng for Local Upper and Remote and Lower FIM On In frame synchronization Off Power off or held in reset Flashing Out of synchronization or Tx or Rx cables might be reversed Note If a remote MFC Status LED is OFF go to the FIM and check its local FIM Status LED If it is ON the fiber cable may be faulty Alarms LEDs Alarm State LED Meaning Critical On Red Indicates that customer service has been lost and immediate maintenance is required A critical alarm invokes system fail transfer if enabled This LED will be on during POR power on reset or when the INIT switch is activated resets all boards Off No alarm Major On Red Indicates that service has degraded beyond predetermined thresholds This LED is also on when there is a critical Alarm This LED will be on during POR or INIT switch active Off No alarm Minor On Red Indicates the presence of a minor malfunction in the system A minor alarm is raised whenever the system is not fully operational This LED is also on when there is a critical Alarm This LED will be on during POR or INIT switch active Off No alarm Alarms OFF On Green Alarm is on but silenced Silence state is toggled by the Remove Alarms ON OFF switch On Green During POR or INIT switch active Off Alarm is audible Off During power up state Integrated Voice Mail Major On Red The voice mail is not functioning or disk space is at 95 Off No a
212. nowledges Group signals and requests digit information for the calling party optional When you are defining the specific signals in each group the IMAT menus list each tone number and the corresponding signal token The following tables list the tokens in each group and their meanings Event Group Event Token Description T1_DIGIT_1 Process digit 1 to T1_DIGIT_9 to Process digit 9 T1_DIGIT_0O Process digit 0 T1_INCOMING_OP Marks the caller as an operator T1 DELAY OP Marks the caller as a delay operator T1 ACCS TEST EQUIP Marks the caller as test equipment T1 REQ HALF ECHO SUPRES Indicates that the call requires half echo suppression T1 END OF INFO Indicates end of pulsing T1 SPARE Spare token T1 REQ NOT ACCEPTED Call setup request is not accepted Release 3 3 Specifications Event Group 11 Event Token Description T2_NATNL_SUBS Marks the caller as a national subscriber T2 NATNL PRI SUBS Marks the caller as a national subscriber with PRI T2 NATNL MAINT EQUIP Marks the caller as maintenance equipment T2 SPARE Spare token T2 NATNL OP Marks the caller as a national operator T2 NATNL DATA TRANS Marks the call as a national data transmission T2 INTNATNL SUBS Marks the caller as an international subscriber T2 INTNATNL DATA TRANS Marks the call as an international data tran
213. o the base of the unit If required secure the mounting brackets to the SUPERSET HUB case by using the holes appropriate to the selected mounting position and install the unit in an equipment rack or mount the unit on a wall Note The side which contains the row of RJ 45 connectors faces the front when the unit is rack mounted or the top when the unit is wall mounted If you are wall mounting the unit use wall anchors that are appropriate for the wall type use 12 screws that are at least 1 5 inches long and ensure that the screws are not fully tightened so that the unit may be easily removed without the use of a tool for servicing Ensure that the ventilation holes are not blocked Remove the black plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cables and from the connector ferrules on the unit Connect the fiber optic cables from the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier in the Peripheral Cabinet to the connectors on the SUPERSET HUB unit Connect the RJ 45 connectors to the UTP distribution panel according to the building wiring plan Connect the power cable to a convenient wall socket Note The wall socket is the main disconnect device and must therefore be installed near the unit and be easily accessible Program the peripheral devices Note Program the SUPERSET HUB as a DNI Line Card in the slot where the Peripheral Slot FIM Carrier is inserted Release 3 3 159 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install the Digital Service Unit Over
214. ocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Brazil Tone Plan Tone dica Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 425 Continuous Busy 425 0 25 on 0 25 off repeat Camp on 440 0 1 on 0 05 off x 2 Conference 440 1 on off Confirmation 425 Continuous Dial Tone 425 Continuous Feature Active Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Interrupted Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Message Notification 425 440 4251425 0 2 on 0 2 off x 4 then 440 0 2 on 0 2 off x 2 then 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 4 then 425 continuous Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 440 0 8 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 425 0 25 on 0 25 off 0 75 on 0 25 off repeat Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Special Ringback 425 0 5 on 0 5 off 0 5 on 2 5 off repeat Transfer Dial 425 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off 20 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Busy 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Dial 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Camp on 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Conference 19 19 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Confirmation 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Feature Active Dial 23 23
215. of Echo Cancellation Four External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 700 USER SYSTEM WITH 64 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 128 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0414 54 Release 3 3 Specifications Mitel Networks 3300 Controller Dimensions Physical Dimensions Height 2 625 in 6 66 cm 1 5 U Width 17 75 in 45 1 cm 19 rack mountable Depth 15 5 in 39 4 cm Weight 15 8 Ib 7 17 kg 3300 Controller Environment Storage Environment Condition Specification Temperature 40 to 140 F 40 to 60 C Humidity 15 95 Relative Humidity non condensing Vibration 0 5 g 7 to 100 Hz any orthogonal axis 1 5 g 100 to 500 Hz any orthogonal axis Mechanical Stress One 15 3 cm 6 in drop each edge and corner adjacent to the rest face unpackaged One 76 2 cm 30 in drop each edge and corner packaged in cardboard amp foam Operational Environment Condition Specification Temperature 41 to 95 F 5 to 35 C Humidity 40 90 Relative Humidity non condensing Maximum Heat Dissipation fully loaded see Note 750 BTUs per hour Air Flow
216. ogin to the System Administration Tool http 192 168 1 2 username is system password is password License and Option Selection form program number of digital links IP device licenses and country variant Reboot the system 7 Controller Module Configuration form Select the Programmed Module Type 8 Network Services Unit Configuration form Set the type of NSU and the protocol to be used 9 Program digital trunks Q SIG or MSDN DPNSS 11 12 13 14 Program Symbol Wireless phones as per instructions in System Administration Tool Note You will require the ESS ID s of the Air Access Points for the configuration required by the Symbol MiNET Phone Administrator Tool Note Information on the steps requiring the Symbol NetVision MINET Phone Administrator Tool can be found in the tool s help system You will be required to upgrade the Symbol phones firmware to the MiNET protocol Perform a Backup Reboot the system Set the 3300 Controller RTC IP address through a communication program Install a Universal NSU Release 3 3 165 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Install 3300 ICP as a Stand alone Voice Mail The 3300 ICP can be used as a voice mail system adjunct to a legacy or third party PBX To install as a stand alone voice mail system Install the 3300 ICP Controller Install the System ID Module 3 Connect power to the 3300 Controller The controller will come up in 15 to 20 minutes with factory ins
217. oint Protocol For the Logon procedure select Use logon script and then click Browse Select pridun scp Click OK and then click Next In the Internet account logon information box leave the username and password fields blank and then click Next Dialog boxes appear that warn you that you will not be able to connect to your Internet service provider without your user name and your password Disregard these warnings and click Yes on these boxes to continue Enter the Connection name then click Next In the box to set up an Internet mail account select No then click Next De select the option to connect to the Internet immediately then click Finish In the Network and Dial up Connections window right click on the new DUN connection point to Properties then click Configure From the Maximum speed bps drop down list select 38400 for the baud rate Click OK until you exit the windows Install the 3300 R2 NSU To install and configure the 3300 R2 NSU 1 Set the DIP switches for the protocol and site installation The default configuration of the DIP switches will support T1 protocols in network termination mode Establish a fiber connection from the fiber port on the NSU to the fiber port on the 3300 Controller Connect the NSU LO and or L1 port to the remote system the PSTN or another system Install a Direct Connection Device Driver on a PC Refer to Install the 3300 Universal NSU for details Release 3 3 133
218. ollowing example when an IP device assigned to a non default zone calls a TDM device G 729ac compression will be invoked on the LAN or WAN side of the call providing there are adequate compression resources available in the controller The same applies to calls that originate from a TDM device and terminate on an IP device assuming compression is required Release 3 3 35 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 36 TETTETETT Uncompressed Voice Stream Compressed Voice Stream Pri Device TDM Device PSTN 4 This Analog Peripheral X Unit 3300 ICP LAN WAN ETHERNET IP Device IP Device IP Device 0484 When controllers networked together the becomes more complex The following examples are assuming that the IP devices are in different compression zones The WAN link is assumed to be G 729 compressed The LAN link is assumed to be in the same compression zone and running G 711 An IP device on one system connecting to an IP device on a different system across a WAN link IP trunking does not require a compression license as the conversion done on the DSP resources in the IP phones An IP device on one system connecting to a TDM device on a different system across a WAN link IP trunking will consume one compression licence from the system that the TDM device is connected to A TDM device on one system connecting to a TDM device on a different system using IP
219. om support This provides 4DSP devices for telecom functions for 100 users 64 channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity to NSUs No Peripheral Shelves can be connected in this configuration without adding more DSP resources unless there are no ASU connections Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITHOUT COMPRESSION Slot 4 21161 DSP Telecom IP0473 40 Release 3 3 Specifications 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels This system uses One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One dual FIM One DSP Module 21161 for telecom support One DSP Module 21161 for 32 channels of compression This provides 4 DSP devices for telecom functions for 100 users 4 DSP devices for 32 channels of compression 64 channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections 2 ASU connections CIM ports for up to 48 ONS ports The two external FIM connections are for providing connectivity to NSUs No Peripheral Shelves can be connected in this configuration without adding more DSP resources unless there are no ASU connections Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 100 USER SYSTEM WITH 32 COMPRESSION CHANNELS Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Telecom 100 32 Compression IP0472
220. ons Gateway to 3300 ICP Software 206 Only one 3800 Wireless Applications Gateway WAG can be migrated to a 3300 ICP at a time Only D S Wireless phones can be migrated Migration and Configuration cannot be performed in a single task or session using the 3300 Configuration Tool After migration configuration must be completed using System Administration Tool Data restoration automatically triggers data migration Windows 2000 users should clear the browser cache For steps requiring the Configuration Tool refer to the Configuration Tool Help System Install the Symbol NetVision MiNET Phone Administrator Tool on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 PC To transfer database from a 3800 WAG to a 3300 ICP 1 Prepare the 3800 ICP for migration Export the Name Number and PIN of each user with a Symbol phone to a csv file using the Telephone Directory Export Application in OPS Manager Change OPS Manager Configuration Settings Prepare the 3300 ICP for migration Enable Options and manually reboot the system Change the System name in the System Options Assignment to match that of the system being migrated Set the IP Address Host Name FTP Username and FTP password to match the Configuration Tool PC in the Controller Registry Configuration form Program 3800 WAG connectivity using the Configuration Tool Create a Network Element that is the same as the 3800 WAG Backup 3800 WAG database datasave to the 3300 Conf
221. or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 64 compression channels to a 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis The old Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Remove and keep the Sys ID Module 3 Remove and keep the Hard Drive The new Release 3 2 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Install the two DSP Modules Slot 3 and Slot 4 3 Install the Sys Id Module that you removed from the 3 0 3 1 chassis 4 Install the Hard Drive that you removed from the 3 0 3 1 chassis 5 Replace the cover 250 User System Add 64 Compression Channels Slot 8 Slot 5 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0417 Note Some controllers in release 3 0 had the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs 250 User System Add 64 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 250usersystem Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add supportfor 64 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports requires a new Release 3 2 chassis Note Retain your System ID Module and Hard Drive The 250 user 64 compression channel upgrade package includes One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Add the following modules Two DSP Modules 21161
222. ord You see the 3300 ICP ESM main tools menu Q Tip If your login fails it may be because the system is not finished loading Once you see Voice Mail successfully started in the RTC you should be able to log in 35 Set the options in the License and Option Selection form according to your purchased Mitel options Note Since the installation of new software erases all of your system settings you must complete this form even if you have not purchased any new options To set the options Atthe main tools menu click System Administration Tool Click in the Selection drop down menu where it says Click here to start Click System Configuration click System Capacity and then click License and Option Selection You see the License and Option Selection view Click Change in the top right corner You see a pop up window Click OK to proceed to change your options Clicking Cancel will return you to the License and Option Selection view Enter the purchased system options Note that you can change the Country Net working Option Mitai Tapi Computer Integration and Extended Agent Group fields without a new Mitel Options Password Enter your Mitel Options Password and click Save Timer The system can take up to 3 minutes to save your changes Restoring the database 36 A pop up window instructs you If you have a database to restore do that now If there is no database to restore reboot now Click OK You
223. orrect power up LEDs sequence 244 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Symptom Resolution The end device operates but there is no data link Verify that the Power Active LED on the 3300 In Line Power Unit front panel is lit continuously Verify that the Data In and Data amp Power Out ports correspond The end device may require a Mitel Networks 3300 Phone Power adapter p n 57003121 at the set end to operate If an adapter is already in use replace it with a new adapter If this works discard the faulty adapter Verify that you are using a standard UTP Category 5 6 or 6e cable including all 8 wires 4 pairs and is 100m or less in length between the switch and the end device Verify that you are not using any crossover twisted pair wires Verify that the 3300 In Line Power Unit is connected to a switch hub with a good RJ 45 patch cord connection Try to bypass the long twisted pair cable and bring the end device close to the 3300 In Line Power Unit and connect to one of the ports using a short cable if it works there is probably a faulty connection or short on the long cable or one bad RJ 45 connection along the line Try to connect a different end device to the same port if it works and the link is established there is probably a faulty data link in the end device Try to re connect the end device to a different Data amp Power Out port and remember to move the Data In port of the switch
224. otification 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Modem Answer 24 24 21 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 27 27 24 22 25 22 22 20 24 Paging 21 21 18 16 19 16 16 14 18 Reorder 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Ringback 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Special Busy 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Special Ringback 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Page 1 of 2 32 Release 3 3 Specifications Tone Output Levels iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT Transfer Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Voice Mail 21 21 18 16 19 16 16 14 18 Page 2 of 2 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country United Kingdom Tone Plan Tone Cadence s ARS 2nd Dial 350 440 Continuous Busy 400 0 35 on 0 35 off repeat Camp on 400 0 1 on off Conference 400 0 1 on off Confirmation 350 440 Continuous Dial 350 440 Continuous Feature Active Dial 350 440 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Interrupted 1400 0 1 on off Message Notification 350 440 350 440 0 75 on 0 75 off x 2 then 440 0 1 on 0 75 off then 350 440 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Num
225. ou are using both ports Note The R2 coaxial cables have both transmit arrow pointing away from cable and receive arrow pointing towards cable connectors When you set the card for trunk side termination jumper at NT position connect the R2 coaxial cable transmit lead to the network receive connector and the R2 coaxial receive lead to the network transmit connector When you set the card for line side termination jumper at LT position connect the R2 coaxial cable transmit lead to the network transmit connector and the R2 coaxial receive lead to the network receive connector Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs RJ 45 Conncector Pin Functions Pin Function 1 amp 2 TX 4 amp 5 RX Field Replaceable Units Hardware Part Number Description 50000363 Power Distribution Unit 50000730 CEPT Interface Assembly 50001245 3300 32 Channel Echo Canceller 50001246 3300 64 Channel Echo Canceller 50001247 3300 128 Channel Echo Canceller 50001248 3300 Dual Fiber Interface Module 50001260 3300 Hard Disk Replacement 50001261 3300 250 to 700 Controller Upgrade Kit FIM and Echo Canceller exchange DSP for the new DSP 50001266 3300 Analog Services Unit 4 16 Combo NA 50001267 3300 Analog Services Unit 24 Port NA 50001268 3300 Analog Services Unit 4 16 Combo UK 50001269 3300 Analog Services Unit 24 Port UK 50
226. ow Driver for Windows 2000 To install and configure Direct Connection Device Driver for Windows 2000 Professional 1 On the Start menu point to Settings then click Control Panel 2 Double click Phone and Modem Options icon 3 Select the Modem tab 4 Click Add 5 Click Other on the Install New Modem screen 6 Select Don t detect my modem will select it from a list and click Next 7 In the Modems field select Communications cable between two computers then click Next 8 Select COM 1 or COM 2 then click Next 9 Click Finish 10 The COM Port will be displayed in the Phone and Modem Options window Modems tab Select the COM Port and then click Properties 11 From the Maximum Port Speed drop down menu select 38400 12 In the Communications cable between two computers select the Advanced tab and then click Change Default Preferences 13 From the Port speed drop down list select 38400 and then from the Flow control drop down list select None 14 Select the Advanced tab From the drop down menus set the fields as follows Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 15 Click OK and close the Control Panel window Release 3 3 131 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 132 Create a Dial up Network Connection Typically you will want to follow this procedure twice to create two Dial up Networking connections one for on site direct access and one for remote modem access Refer to detailed instructions for
227. ower receptacle on the rear of the Unit To power up the 3300 In Line Power Unit 1 Insert a power cord into the power socket on the rear of the 3300 In Line Power Unit 2 Insert the other end of the power cord into the power receptacle The 3300 In Line Power Unit powers up and the internal fans begin operating Power Up LED Sequence The 3300 In Line Power Unit then runs through its Power On Self Test POST which takes less than 10 seconds During the POST all ports on the 3300 In Line Power Unit are disabled and the LEDs light up in the following sequence 1 The AC and Alarm LEDs light up 2 After approximately 2 seconds all Power Active and Power Not Active LEDs light up Release 3 3 167 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3 After approximately 2 seconds all Power Active and Power Not Active LEDs and the Alarm LED turn off 4 The AC LED will light up and remain lit 5 All Power Active and Power Not Active LEDs are ready for normal indications Connecting Cables to the In Line Power Unit All ofthe ports on the front ofthe 3300 In Line Power Unit are configured as data route through ports for all data wires pins 1 2 3 and 6 Be certain to use a standard Category 5 6 or 6e straight through cable including all 8 wires 4 pairs as shown in Figure 5 Data In Ports Using a standard Category 5 6 or 6e straight through cable connect cable leading from the Ethernet Switch Hub to the Data I
228. provides two overhead paging outputs In combination with their relay contacts two paging zones are supported ASU Paging Zone Number Paging Circuit s Relay Position 1 1 Off 2 1 On 3 2 Off 4 2 On 0 1 amp 2 Off amp Off System Fail Transfer 3300 Universal ASU only Four System Fail Transfer SFT relays are supported one per LS trunk circuit Control of the relay is via loss of power power fail transfer or software directed transfer System Fail Transfer The SFT switches activate under the following conditions Failure of the 3300 Controller Interruption of the system AC power Loss of the CIM link between the 3300 Controller and ASUs SFT requires fixed mapping between four ONS ports and LS trunks as follows LS Trunk ONS Port 13 14 15 16 Bl wl N gt Release 3 3 71 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Note When the 3300 Universal ASU is in reset condition it goes into System Fail Transfer mode While in this mode the 4 ONS pre defined circuits and the corresponding LS circuits will be connected together by hardware relays allowing callers to make calls without any local call control intervention telephones are connected directly to the CO or exchange Peripheral Node Peripheral Unit Components Each peripheral cabinet holds up to 12 Peripheral Interface Cards and provides up to 192 ONS or DNI ports With the Peripheral Unit Expan
229. ps 1 2 Establishing connection to the 3300 Controller Steps 3 16 Backing up the database Steps 17 26 Installing 3 3 software upgrading Steps 27 32 Rebooting Steps 33 35 Setting your purchased Mitel options Steps 36 43 Restoring the database Steps 44 48 Performing maintenance checks Step 49 Resetting to initialize Voice Mail Steps 50 52 Upgrading IP sets and renewing set leases Upgrade Procedure Note Ensure that no one else makes changes to the database when you set the License and Options selection form Any changes not included in your backup restore will be lost Note Before beginning the upgrade procedure Windows 2000 users should clear the browser cache Note If a Security Information Warning pop up window appears during this procedure click Yes to continue Establishing a connection to the 3300 Controller 1 Q 9 Using an RJ45 Ethernet cable connect your laptop PC directly to one of the 3300 ICP Ethernet ports Tip Your laptop PC must be on the same subnet as the RTC IP address otherwise a router will be required on your network and the gateway IP address of that router must be applied to the RTC setup as well as to your laptop PC Also make sure that your PC s IP address does not conflict with the E2T or RTC IP addresses Tip Check the FTP site properties and ensure that the FTP username is also programmed on the RTC If you use another username make sure that it permits you to access the F
230. ptic cable To install the PRI card 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist 2 Insert the PRI card into the slot and close the locking latches Connect PRI Card to the Network To connect the PRI card to the network 1 Unpack and inspect the ISDN PRI cables Retain the original package 2 Plug the ISDN PRI cable into the PRI port 3 Plug the ISDN PRI cable into the network terminating equipment Note A dual port card needs two ISDN PRI cables if you are using both ports Install for PRI QSIG To install and configure the PRI Card in the DSU as a PRI QSIG variant refer to the 3300 Universal NSU Install for PRI QSIG instructions These are the steps that are required for installation and programming 1 Connect a computer to the PRI card Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs Install a Direct Connection Device Driver on a computer Create a Dial up Network connection on your computer Connect the computer to the PRI Card Use the IMAT Tool to complete required PRI configuration Connect the PRI Card to the ISDN network oa Fw N Install a Peripheral Resource Card Each FIM in the DSU must have a Peripheral Resource Card PRC installed above it To install a PRC in a DSU WARNING Power must not be applied to the Peripheral Unit while you are installing the Peripheral Resource card 1 Unpack the PRC Slide the PRC into the top of slot 1 until it connects firmly with the backplane Fasten the
231. put Specifications Note Connector is a Standard Male IEC320 AC input Voltage Universal input design operating input voltages from 90VAC to 264VAC It regulates a 5 48V 30V 5V 70VAC ringing signal and the 115VAC Message Waiting Signal Current lt 1 0A RMS at 90VAC full rated load Frequency AC input frequencies from 47Hz to 63Hz Holdover With an input voltage of 120VAC or 240VAC under a full rated load the power supply outputs remain in regulation for a minimum of 16ms after loss of AC mains input voltage Brown Out Recovery Recovers from an AC input brown out or sag condition automatically 3300 ASU and Universal ASU Pin Allocations CIM Connector Pin Allocations Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 RX 5 Not Used 2 RX 6 TX 3 TX 7 Not Used 4 Not Used 8 Not Used Note The 3300 Universal ASU connects to the 3300 Controller over a Category 5 Universal Twisted Pair UTP cross over cable through a CIM interface The Category 5 cable is of the same type used for Ethernet connections and within the cable twisted pairs are arranged as 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 Each tied pair is connected to a 75 ohm resistor The 3300 Universal ASU can be located up to 30 meters 98 4 feet away from the 3300 Controller The interface employs a single standard 8 pin modular jack consisting of 2 balanced signal pairs and is located on the front of the unit 25 pair Connector Pin Alloca
232. r set it to the maximum AC scale then reduce the setting gradually to the 10 VAC range If the potential is greater than 1 VAC recheck the ground connections and repeat the measure If the reading still exceeds 1 VAC the building ground is unacceptable Connect the pro tective earth wire to a new building ground and repeat the steps 7 through 9 until you have an acceptable AC potential WARNING Do not continue until you have a potential of 1 VAC or less between the building ground and the protective earth ground stud Otherwise personal injury and or equipment damage may result Reconnect the protective earth wire to the protective earth ground stud and attach the anti static wrist strap to your wrist Slide the installed circuit cards back into contact with the cabinet backplane Ensure that each card is fully inserted in its slot Release 3 3 139 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Power Converter To install an AC power converter WARNING Danger to personnel and or equipment damage could result if the cabinet is not powered off during installation of the AC power converter 1 Atthe rear of the cabinet remove the two screws that fasten the internal AC power cord access cover plate to the backplane and remove the cover plate see figure Ensure that the switch on the power converter faceplate is set to off 0 Install the power converter in slots 13 through 15 Plug the internal AC power cord from the power distr
233. r 2025 0 95 on 0 05 off repeat Override 425 0 2 on off Paging 425 0 2 on off Reorder 425 0 07 on 0 07 off repeat Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Special Busy 425 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Special Ringback 425 1 on 4 off repeat Transfer Dial 425 0 75 on 0 75 off repeat Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Release 3 3 27 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Tone Output Levels iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs ATT ARS 2nd Dial 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Busy 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Dial 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Camp on 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Conference 18 18 15 13 16 13 13 11 15 Confirmation 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Feature Active Dial 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Interrupted Dial 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Message Notification 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Modem Answer 24 24 21 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 22 22 19 17 20 17 17 15 19 Paging 23 23 20 18 21 18 18 16 20 Reorder 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Ringback 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Special Busy 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Special Ringback 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Transfer Dial 16 16 13 11 14 11 11 9 13 Voice Mail 23 23 20 18 21 18 18 16
234. r cables customer supplied per Peripheral Unit Cables terminate at the node on 50 pin plugs J1 through J8 with the number of cables being dependent on the quantity and type of interface cards installed in the node Plugs J1 through J8 are hardwired to backplane connectors in slots 1 through 12 to form four slot groups each comprising three adjacent cards and each associated with a pair of plugs Two adjacent slot groups are shown in Backplane Connector Arrangements The circuits of interface cards contained in a slot group are evenly distributed to the relevant pair of plugs such that half the circuits of each card in a group are connected to the odd numbered plug and half to the even numbered plug Peripheral Wiring Backplane details the hardwire connections between one slot group and the associated plugs The wiring sequence is identical for the remaining three slot groups Cable jacks P1 through P8 customer supplied and should be labeled at time of installation P1 through P8 are secured to J1 through J8 with hook and loop type fasteners Equipment which is external to the system i e system to cross connect field cables and cross connect field hardware is not supplied by MITEL Therefore the type of equipment used and the layout of the cross connect field cables is at the discretion of the installation company Installation information for such equipment must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer Release 3 3 141 330
235. ram the FTP User Account and Password 1 Click Start point to Programs point to Administrative Tools and then click Computer Management 2 Click Local Users and Groups 3 Click Users Release 3 3 127 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 4 Click Action 5 Click New User 6 Complete the user information and click Create Assign Domain Account Windows 2000 To assign the Domain Account 1 Click Start point to Programs point to Administrative Tools and then click Computer Management Click Local Users and Groups Click Groups Click Add and add your users and groups Click OK 9 d eh Configure IIS 5 Settings To Configure Internet Information Services version 5 you must configure the following Set Anonymous Connection of the default FTP site Set Anonymous Connection on the Default Web Site Set up the Default Web Site To Set Anonymous Connection of the default FTP site 1 Click Start point to Programs point to Administrative Tools and then click Internet Service Manager 2 Selectthe Default FTP Site 3 Select Action Properties 4 Select Security Account tab select the box Allow Anonymous Connections deselect Allow Only Anonymous Connections To Set Anonymous Connection on the Default Web Site 1 Click Start point to Programs point to Administrative Tools and then click Internet Service Manager Select the Default Web Site Select Action Properties Select Directo
236. re 9125 070 002 NA PRI T1 Card CD ROM Software 9125 070 011 NA Euro ISDN PRI Card Release 6 Application Software 9125 070 012 NA ISDN PRI Card Release 6 Application Software 9125 501 001 NA ISDN Min Max Software Option for the PRI Card 9125 501 002 NA ISDN Auto Min Max Software Option for the PRI Card 9125 501 003 NA ISDN NFAS Software Option for the PRI Card 9125 501 004 NA ISDN D Channel Back up software option PRI Card 9125 501 005 NA ISDN remote LAN Access software option PRI Card Release 3 3 Chapter 5 Programming 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 232 Release 3 3 Programming Programming Overview of Programming To program the system 1 Use the 3300 Configuration Tool Refer to the 3300 Configuration Tool online help for programming information 2 Use the System Administration Tool Refer to the System Administration Tool online help for programming information 3 Use IMAT Register the IP telephones Note The following options are required in the DHCP server programming 3 Router Default Gateway IP Address 6 DNS Server IP Address 66 TFTP Server ASCII String format typically the 3300 ICP Controller 67 TFTP BootFile ASCII String sysro e2t8260 128 TFTP Server IP address format typically the 3300 ICP Controller 129 RTC IP address format typically the 3300 ICP Controller 130 P phone DHCP Server ASCII String M
237. ring an end device without turning the Power Active LED on Re connect the end device to a different Data amp Power Out port if the LED turns on there is a fault in the previous output port probably a faulty LED Is it safe to keep the 3300 In Line Power Unit running while Power Not Active LED is on Yes this is a safe condition Power Not Active conditions mean that a non power ready device was detected terminals 4 5 and 7 8 are shorted together or forced external power feed into the port During these conditions port power is disconnected However a single low power pulse every 5 sec continues to sense the line Release 3 3 245 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Peripheral Unit Troubleshoot Fiber Interface Module FIBER INTERFACE MODULE FIM TT LU E H FIBER TYPE MULTIMODE Me OR SINGLE MODE AND M PTICAL WAVELENGTH LI lt FIMSTATUS LED TRANSMIT CONNECTOR L ER co REMOTE FIM STATUS LED e RECEIVE CONNECTOR o HS BB 382 There are two LEDs on each FIM The top LED indicates the status of the FIM itself the bottom LED indicates the status of the other FIM the FIM connected to the far end of the fiber optic cable Fiber Interface Module LEDs FIM LED State Meaning On In frame synchronization Off Power off or held in reset
238. ringing It is installed in slots 13 to 15 Peripheral Switch Controller card PSC The PSC card performs all peripheral switch functions for up to 12 Peripheral Interface cards or 24 cards with the addition of a peripheral slave cabinet It is installed in slot 16 of the master peripheral cabinet Fiber Interface Module FIM The FIM connects the peripheral node to the control node It is installed in slot 17 of the master peripheral cabinet Cabinet Frame Each peripheral cabinet has 17 slots numbered from left to right Slots 1 to 12 support Peripheral Interface cards and slots 13 to 15 hold the Power Converter A master peripheral cabinet also holds a PSC card in slot 16 a FIM in slot 17 and a Peripheral Interconnect card in slot 16B if your unit is expanded A peripheral slave cabinet holds a Peripheral Interconnect card in slot 16 in addition to the Peripheral Interface cards and Power Converter Slots 16B and 17 of the slave cabinet are not programmable Note 3300 peripheral cabinets with a slightly smaller frame are available for stacking in a 19 rack Power Distribution Unit PDU AC The AC PDU filters and switches the 120 240 Vac input power to the Power Converter and fan assembly Power Distribution Unit PDU DC The DC PDU filters and switches the 48 Vdc input power to the Power Converter and fan assembly Note that the server is available in AC version only Fan Assembly Two fans in the removable fan assembly coo
239. rmat the 3300 Controller hard drive and install new software Release 3 3 195 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 196 WARNING This procedure will erase all system settings including Voice Mail messages so you must back up your database Mitel Options Password A new Mitel Options Password is Required to upgrade from 3 0 3 1 and 3 2 to 3 3 software if you have purchased new options Required to upgrade from 3 0 to 3 3 even if you have not purchased new options Notrequired to upgrade from 3 1 or 3 2 to 3 3 ifyou have not purchased new options You must access your Mitel Options Password through Mitel Online www mitel com This password is required during the upgrade procedure so you MUST keep a proper record of it Anew password is issued to you if you are purchasing new options Call Mitel Customer Service during normal business hours prior to attempting the software upgrade to confirm a previous password or to purchase new options and receive a new password Java Plug In Java Plug in 1 3 0 comes with S W 3 0 7 11 During ESM backup restore procedures on this software version the software detects whether the proper version of Java Plug in 1 3 0 or later has been installed If not it will prompt you to install the correct version with the installation wizard If you are currently using Java Plug in 1 3 1 you can proceed with the upgrade provided that your PC is not used to access OPS Manager Java Plug in 1 3
240. roller Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Set up an Ethernet connection between the 3300 Controller and the 3300 Configuration Tool PC a standard LAN cable from an RJ 45 connector on the 3300 Controller L2 switch to the PC NIC Note You can connect IP telephones to the 3300 Controller through L2 switch external ports on the 250 User and 700 User Controllers for testing only after installation of the database and configuration IP Phones require a configured DHCP server 250 700 User Controller 3300 ICP Controller Installation Dual FIM Ports 3386 Castreller Pa 101 2 E SIS 5 SY __ p I TIT Serial Connection For Setting IP Ethernet Ports 4 CIM Ports to ASU Layer 2 Switch 888383 2 38 8 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 IP0184 Release 3 3 Installing 100 User Controller Dual FIM Ports 3300 Controller m es Es SC NN o z35 o ah E E moogt 8 235 GNE Ethernet Port 2 CIM Ports to ASU 3 3 3 3 8 8 8 3 2 B 3 LI E Restore DB Program FTP IP Phones Serial Connection For Setting IP IP0471 Install the Hard Drive CAUTION To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet being serviced andimmediately place any item removed from a ca
241. roller Environment 55 3300 Controller Power 55 3300 Controller PCB Interfaces 56 Release 3 3 iii 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 3300 Network Services 57 Mitel Networks 3300 Universal NSU Components 57 3300 Universal NSU Protocols 58 3300 Universal NSU DIP Switch Settings 58 Mitel Networks 3300 R2 NSU Components 59 3300 R2 NSU Protocols 59 3300 R2 NSU DIP Switch Settings 60 Mitel Networks 3300 BRI NSU Components 60 3300 BRI NSU Protocols 61 Mitel Networks 3300 NSU Dimensions 61 3300 NSU Environment 61 3300 pe RR RU ROC fs 62 3300 NSU Pin Allocations 62 3300 Analog Services 64 Mitel Networks 3300 Universal ASU Components 64 Mitel Networks 330
242. rt immediately Install the 3300 ASU Before you begin ensure there is a free CIM port on the 3300 Controller To install the 3300 ASU Mount the 3300 ASU in the 19 inch rack if applicable Connect the supplied cross over Category 5 cable with RJ 45 connector to the CIM port on the 3300 ASU and a free CIM port on the 3300 Controller Up to four ASUs can be connected to a 3300 Controller 3 Complete telephony cabling 4 Complete programming 5 Connect power to the 3300 ASU CIM LEDs will be on once the CIM link synchronizes The 3300 Controller will detect the 3300 ASU and the application software will download and start immediately Install the Peripheral Unit 136 Overview of the Peripheral Unit Installation To install a Peripheral Unit AON oOo PE wn Unpack position and ground the Peripheral Unit Check the card layout Connect the fiber cable to the node Check the grounding Install the power converter Install the Peripheral Interface cards Cable the node to the MDF Power up the Peripheral Unit Note For information about removing and replacing the front panel of the cabinet see Front Panels in the Install Upgrades and FRUs section Once you have completed these steps you can proceed to Installing a DSU Node Installing a SUPERSET HUB or return to System Installation Overview Release 3 3 Installing Unpack Position and Ground the Peripheral Unit To unpack position and gro
243. ry Security tab a N Click Edit in Anonymous Access and Authentication Control select Basic Authentication Password is sent in Clear Text 128 Release 3 3 Installing pmo 0 Click OK Click Yes from the warning Click OK from the Inheritance Override Window do not select any nodes Click Apply Click OK To Set up the Default Web Site 1 o WN Click Start point to Programs point to Administrative Tools and then click Internet Service Manager Select the Default Web Site Select Action Properties Select Documents tab Select Add and Enter default asp Move this to the top of the list Click Apply Click OK Copy the identitydb obj file To copy the identitydb obj file 1 gv dm o 19 Open the OPS Client web page Click Configuration Tool Client Resources Click the Trusting Configuration Tool Applet Click on identitydb obj file Click Save Save the file to your local account Documents and Settings V name Install the 3300 Universal NSU Install the 3300 Universal NSU To install the 3300 Universal NSU 1 Set DIP switch 6 for Network or Line termination mode The default is network termination mode Refer to Universal NSU DIP Switch Settings Establish a fiber connection from the fiber port on the NSU to the fiber port on the 3300 Controller Connect the NSU LO and or L1 port to the remote system the PSTN or another system by using Category 5 cable
244. s been detected Yellow and Red On out of service this combination appears at power up Green Yellow and Red On at power up before fully operational No LEDs illuminated fully operational Fiber Interface Module LEDs FIM Upper LED State Meaning for Local upper and Remote lower FIM On In frame synchronization Off Power off or held in reset Release 3 3 239 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Fiber Interface Module LEDs Flashing Out of synchronization or Tx and Rx cables reversed Note When a remote MFC Status LED is off go to the FIM and check its local FIM Status LED If it is on then the fiber optic cable may be faulty Troubleshoot the 3300 R2 NSU To access the 3300 R2 NSU maintenance window 1 Connect the modem or the straight through cable to the 3300 R2 NSU 2 For terminal emulation dumb terminal do the following Runa communications package for example ProComm Plus Ensure that the settings are 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit 38400 baud rate R2 NSU Link Status LED State Meaning LAN flashing LAN activity MS message system solid green message link open to the system off message link not open to the system ST status flashing operational off not operational solid card in booting LO and L1 right side solid red error no physical layer is present or network line side NT LT jumper is not set corre
245. s dedicated to one system only the circuit must not be shared with any other equipment Each receptacle of the branch circuit should have a rating of 120 V 60 Hz 15 A or 230 V 50Hz 8 A for 230 V systems If the total power requirements ofthe entire system exceed the rating of one branch circuit individual dedicated branch circuits may be installed for each unit Each unit must have one power receptacle that is three wire type with the ground wire connected to the ground of the electrical system Do not attempt to defeat the grounding conductor The receptacle must not be controlled by a switch The location of the power receptacle must be accessible so that the system can be un plugged during maintenance however you must ensure that the power cord does not present a hazard to users or pedestrians and that it is protected from accidental removal Note To prevent accidental removal attach a warning tag to the plug end of the cord Uninterruptible Power Supply We recommend that you install an uninterruptible power supply UPS for the server Release 3 3 113 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide System Installation Overview To install your 3300 ICP system Install the 3300 Install the ASU DOO P a Qs IS 11 Install Wireless ICP Controller Configure the Controller Install the Universal NSU Install the R2 NSU Install the BRI NSU Install the Universal ASU Install the Peripheral Unit Installthe SUPERSE
246. s from the PSTN into Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS signals for the system Outgoing DPNSS signals from the system into MF R2 signals for the PSTN Release 3 3 59 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 60 3300 R2 NSU DIP Switch Settings MF R2 Port DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Use Default Setting Notes 1 Tx Ground Up Tx shield ground when down 2 Rx Ground Up Rx shield ground when down 3 Impedance selector 1 Up 120 ohm 4 Impedance selector 2 Up 100 ohm 5 Impedance selector 3 Up 75 ohm 6 LT NT selector Up Up for NT down for LT E1 MF R2 Mode Connector DIP Switch Setting BNC Adapter Imped LT NT 1 2 E Required ance Mode Tx Gnd Rx Gnd ohm ohm ohm LT NT No 120 NT Up Up Down Up Up Up No 120 LT Up Up Down Up Up Down Yes 75 NT Note Note Up Up Down Up Yes 75 LT Note Note Up Up Down Down Note Site dependent normally Tx is grounded and Rx is not grounded but that depends on which remote connection is grounded Mitel Networks 3300 BRI NSU Components Front panel RS 232 serial port DB9 connector for installation configuration and maintenance BRI Circuit LEDs e CEPT link Status LED Power LED Reset pin Rear panel yhoo mti ASU Ethernet port RJ 45 connector for future use E1 port to connect to an NSU that is running E1 DPNSS E1 port DIP switches connector 25
247. s fully provisioned Two 2 MB CIM copper interface module ports are used to connect to the ASUs Analog Services Units with cross over Category 5 cable Alarm LEDs 2220 Contratice 0469 Rear Panel Power connector Protective ground to ground the chassis IP0213 Internal Components 20 GB EIDE hard drive 256 Mbytes of memory the 300 MHz RTC that provides main control Stratum 3 clock Up to 64 channel echo canceller 300 MHz 64 Ethernet to Time Division Multiplex E2T channels 300 MHz 38 Release 3 3 Specifications Power fail protected real time clock Digital Signal Processor DSP provides telecom functions Two cooling fans Configurations There are several configuration options for the 3300 ICP 100 Controller 100 User System without Compression 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels 100 User System with 30 Voice Mail Ports 100 User System with 32 Compression Channels and 30 Voice Mail Ports The following top view diagram shows the MMC A slot numbering convention All MMC modules allow connectors to protrude through the front panel 100 USER SYSTEM Slot 4 21161 DSP Telecom IP0473 Release 3 3 39 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 100 User System without Compression This system uses One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One dual FIM One DSP Module 21161 for telec
248. s the central office An open Tip lead condition of 500 ms optional 100 ms or more duration on a CO trunk will release the system connection Momentary open loop conditions of up to 350 ms optional 100 ms generated by the central office on outgoing system calls will not release calls Station on hook conditions will release a trunk connection after the selected maximum time Time Out Information Feature Time Out Period Description No Answer Recall 0 125s If there is no answer at the extension after Timer time out expires it will ringback at the attendant console or transfer station Camp On Recall Timer 0 1805 Incoming calls camped on to a busy station before being returned to the attendant if not answered before time out expires Call Hold Timer 10 600 s Calls placed on hold ring back to the station user upon expiry Attendant Busyout 1 1440 min System switches to night service if there is no Timer activity at the attendant console after calls are received First Digit Timer 5 60s This is the time the system will wait for the first digit after going offhook at a station Interdigit Timer 3 60s Time between dialed digits Delay Ring Timer 5 60s Time before line rings on key set Callback Cancel Timer 1 24 hrs Time after which callback functions are reset and cleared or cancelled Call Forward No 0 125s Length of time a station rings before the call is Answer Timer forwar
249. sembly Install the R2 card Configure the IMAT database Connect the computer to the R2 card Save the IMAT database onto the R2 card Connect the R2 Card to the PSTN network Configure for Line Side Trunk Side Termination To configure the R2 card for Line Side or Trunk side termination 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the R2 card and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged Ensure the jumper block covers the NT position for the Trunk Side termination and the LT position for Line Side termination Set the termination impedance switch of the line to the up position for 120 ohms or down for 75 ohms Release 3 3 225 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 226 uP 120 9 F DOWN 75 N PBX STATUS B BSL CARD STATUS 8 LEDs BB1190 Install the R2 Card The R2 card is installed in any empty DSU slot The DSU cabinet supplies the power for the card and provides a message interface back to the control cabinet through the FIM interface and the fiber optic cable To install the R2 card 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist 2 Insert the R2 card into the slot and close the locking latches Connect the R2 card to the PSTN network To connect the R2 card to the network 1 Unpack and inspect the R2 coaxial cables 2 Plug the R2 cable into the R2 port 3 Plug the R2 cable into the network terminating equipment Note A dual port card needs two coaxial cables if y
250. sfer Dial 350 425 Continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Tone Output Levels iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Busy 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Camp on 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Conference 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Confirmation 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Feature Active Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Interrupted Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Message Notification 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Modem Answer 24 24 21 19 22 19 19 17 21 Override 27 27 24 22 25 22 22 20 24 Paging 20 20 17 15 18 15 15 13 17 Reorder 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Ringback 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Special Busy 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Special Ringback 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Transfer Dial 17 17 14 12 15 12 12 10 14 Voice Mail 21 21 18 16 19 16 16 14 18 Note DTMF tones are supported Note Digital DGS and IP WAN tones are conveyed as Real Time Transfer Protocol RTP packets Note indicates that this interface is not supported in this country Release 3 3 31 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide
251. shoot the BRI Card STATUS LED LED O LED 1 LED 2 AAJ b GI RCUT LED S 1121 One status LED fifteen circuit LEDs mounted the faceplate status LED shows the status of the CEPT link and each of the circuit LEDs shows the status of one BRI circuit The BRI circuit LEDs are also used during card initialization to indicate the progress of the self test and to indicate that the download is in progress Release 3 3 253 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide BRI LEDs BRI LED State Meaning Off BRI circuit not in use no device connected to circuit Flashing at 1 Hz Idle device connected to the circuit layer 1 established Flashing at 4 Hz Call being established from device on circuit layer 2 established On Call in progress at device on circuit layer 3 established Troubleshoot the CEPT DS1 Formatter Card Refer to PRI Card troubleshooting for a description of LED behavior Troubleshoot the Conference Card FRAME COMMON CONFERENCE 6809 MICRO DX EPROM BUFFERS CARD CIRCUITRY T CHIP N CONNECTOR r STAUSLED r3 x INDICATORS 35 CARD cii is ACTIMTY LEDs fu um DX CHIP BERG HEADER RH 126 254 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshoot the PRI Card C t STATUS LEDs Olt CIRCUIT LEDs Faceplate LEDs BB1128b Three
252. sion a slave cabinet can be added that expands the unit up toa total of 384 ports and 24 Peripheral Interface cards the number of voice channels remains the same One Peripheral Switch Controller PSC card and one Fiber Interface Module FIM is installed in the master cabinet of each Peripheral Unit The PSC card provides control for all Peripheral Interface cards and fiber optic cable connects the FIM to the main control The 3300 Peripheral Cabinet fits into a 19 rack All components are the same as for existing peripheral cabinets only the cabinet frame is slightly smaller This cabinet is dark grey in color and cannot be used with peripheral stacking brackets PERIPHERAL FRONT PERIPHERAL BACK PERIPHERAL SWITCH CONTROLLER POWER CONVERTER INTERNAL AC POWER CABLE ACCESS POWER POWER p DUM COMMUNICATION WIRING 7 PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CARDS SLIDING DOOR FOR FIBER OPTIC FIRFR INTFRFACF MODUI F CABLES BB1139 The peripheral cabinet consists of the following components 72 Release 3 3 Specifications Peripheral Interface Cards The Peripheral Interface cards connect telephone trunks and peripheral devices such as SUPERSET telephones to the system They are located in slots 1 through 12 Power Converter AC The AC power converter converts AC input power to the voltages required by the circuit cards and FIMs 5 Vdc 12 Vdc 27 Vdc 48 Vdc and 80 Vac
253. smission T2 INTNATNL PRI SUBS Marks the caller as an international subscriber with PRI T2 INTNATNL OP Marks the caller as an international operator T2 NATNL SUBS SPECIAL Marks the call for special charging T2 COIN BOX Marks the caller as a coin box T2 IMM CHRGE SRVCE Marks the call as an immediate charge call T2 INTRCEPTN SERVCE OP Marks the caller as an interception service operator Event Group A Event Token Description TA SND NXT DIG Send the next digit TA SND DIG N 1 Send the second last digit TA ADD CMPLT REC B Address is complete Change to Group B signals TA CONGEST NATNL Indicates congestion on the national level TA SND CPC Send the Calling Party Category TA ADD CMPLT END SIG Address is complete Apply charge Set up speech conditions TA SND DIG N 2 Send the third last digit TA SND DIG N 3 Send the fourth last digit TA SND 1ST DIG Send the first digit TA COUNTRY CODE Send the country code TA LANG DIG Send the language or discrimination digit TA NATURE CIRCT Send the nature of the circuit TA SND CALLING LN Send calling language TA ECHO SUPRES Indicates that echo suppression is in use TA_CONGEST_ INTNATNL Indicates congestion at an international exchange TA_VACANT Indicates a vacant line China TA_SPARE Spare token TA_CPC_CHNGE_TO_GRC
254. stalled software To check the connections between the 3300 Controller and the PC PING the 3300 Controller IP address FTP to the 3300 Controller IP address Go to the 3300 Controller URL address http 192 168 1 2 Launch browser to login to the System Administration Tool http 192 168 1 2 username is system password is password Optional Install the Mitel Networks 3300 Configuration Tool on your PC Use the Config uration Tool to reset the default database import the csv file and make programming changes Refer to the 3300 Configuration Tool online help for detailed instructions Enable the options in the License and Option Selection form If you have a database backup restore the customer data to the system and then skip to step 12 Perform a backup If there is no database to restore proceed to step 7 Reboot the system Note A Reboot is only required here if programming is completed manually Once the system has come back up enter the DBMS Save command and wait until completed Verify that the DBMS Save was correctly performed by entering the DBMS Stat command Program the system using the System Administration Tool Configure the DHCP Server with IP addresses provided by the customer Refer to the Note and default settings table following this procedure Perform a Backup Reboot the system Set the 3300 Controller RTC IP address through a communication program Install the other units as
255. status LEDs and 4 circuit LEDs are mounted on the PRI card faceplate Each of the card circuit LEDs shows the status of one PRI circuit PRI Card Link Status LED State Meaning MS message system solid green message link open to the system off message link not open to the system ST status flashing operational off not operational solid card is booting LO and L1 right side solid red error right side off no error left side solid green D channel established left side flashing green Layer 1 established left side off no link right side yellow with left side flashing green alarm indication from far end right side yellow with left side off blue alarm from card normal during link startup Release 3 3 255 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Troubleshoot the R2 Card ome Faceplate LEDs r STATUS LEDs OO be CIRCUIT LEDs Three status LEDs and 4 circuit LEDs are mounted on the R2 card faceplate Each of the card circuit LEDs shows the status of one R2 circuit R2 Card Link Status LED State Meaning MS message system solid green message link open to the system off message link not open to the system ST status flashing operational off not operational solid card in booting LO and L1 right side solid red error no physical layer is present or network line side NT LT jumper is not se
256. stomer purchased options User information CSV file Username and password for the Mitel Networks 3300 Configuration Tool Username and password for the 3300 Controller Serial cable to connect PC to 3300 Controller Ethernet cable to connect PC to 3300 Controller Your PC must meet the following requirements Operating system Windows NT Server Windows NT Workstation Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 Professional or Windows 98 Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 or 6 0 we recommend 6 0 Network Interface Card Full Duplex 10 100 we recommend 100M Note We recommend that you set your monitor resolution to 1024 x 768 If you need to install software not upgrade your PC will also need Serial port for accessing the RTC e Minimum 250MB of free hard disk space Internet Information Server IIS or Personal Web Server PWS Installation Site Allow atleast 76 5 cm 30 inches between the rear of each cabinet and the wall for maintenance access to the system The system must be located in an area that is Dry and clean Release 3 3 111 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide Adequately lit Easily accessible Do not locate the system near Sprinkler systems sweating pipes steam pipes or steam vents Corrosive fumes or exhaust from machinery Electronic equipment that generates strong radio frequency fields such as a radio or television receiver Equipment that
257. support 32 compression channels 64 compression channels Note Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements Note Refer to your Mitel Networks Sales Engineer for specific information on how to upgrade a 3300 ICP system Release 3 3 175 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 176 Before you begin Ensure that the upgrade kit is complete e Check each module to ensure that no damage has occurred in transit You will need a Philips screwdriver Have a 3300 ICP system back up Caution To prevent ESD damage while handling modules on any unit always attach the wrist strap from the cabinet being serviced and immediately place any item removed from a cabinet into an anti static bag You can also migrate e SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP 3200 ICP to 3300 ICP 3800 WAG to 3300 ICP Note There may be system limitations when migrating Check the appropriate system configuration guidelines 100 User System Add Voice Mail Ports 100 user system upgrade to add support for 30 voice mail ports This system uses the following existing modules One embedded 300 MHz RTC E2T processor One embedded 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One 21161 based DSP Module for telecom support Add the following module One DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides 4DSP devices for telecom functions for up to 100 users 30 Vo
258. t correctly right side off no error left side solid green AB signaling established left side flashing green Layer 1 established left side off no link right side yellow with left side flashing green alarm indication from far end right side yellow with left side off blue alarm from card normal during link startup 256 Release 3 3 Troubleshooting Other Troubleshooting Refer to the System Administration Tool for additional troubleshooting information Release 3 3 257 Trademark of Mitel Networks Corporation Copyright 2003 Mitel Networks Corporation All rights reserved
259. tallation is selected and click Next 22 Choose a location in your local FTP server for the InstallSetup program to install files normally this is C inetpub ftproot which is the default FTP home directory for an anonymous user by completing either of the following steps Click Browse to find the location and then click Next to continue You see a read only list of the configurations you have made Release 3 3 199 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide OR Click Next to accept the location displayed and continue You see a read only list of the configurations you have made 23 Click Next Timer The system takes approximately 10 minutes to copy the files to the specified location 24 Ensure that the Read manual instructions to complete the installation check box is selected and click Finish The SWinstallGuide txt README file opens 25 From the SWinstallGuide txt file record the parameters you need to complete step 31 of the next sub procedure Rebooting 26 Close the instructions window Rebooting 27 Launch your communications program that connects to the 3300 ICP serial port 28 Type reboot and press ENTER The 3300 Controller reboots and a Hyperterminal window RTC opens on the installer s laptop PC You can also reboot by pressing the Reset button on the front panel of the 3300 Controller 29 Press a key at the Press any key to stop auto boot prompt Note that you have 10 seconds to complete this step
260. talled software To check the connections between the 3300 Controller and the PC PING the 3300 Controller IP address FTP to the 3300 Controller IP address Go to the 3300 Controller URL address http 192 168 1 2 Launch browser to login to the System Administration Tool http 192 168 1 2 username is system password is password License and Option Selection form program number of digital links voice mail licences and country variant If OPS Manager is being used to manage the voice mail select Yes in the Networking Option field 7 Reboot the system 8 Controller Module Configuration form Select the Programmed Module Type 10 11 12 13 14 15 Network Services Unit Configuration form Set the type of NSU and the protocol to be used Program digital trunks Q SIG or MSDN DPNSS Program voice mail as per instructions in System Administration Tool Perform a Backup Reboot the system Set the 3300 Controller RTC IP address through a communication program Install a Universal NSU Install the 3300 In Line Power Unit 166 The 3300 In Line Power Unit PD PH 4024 AC 48 is suited for use in an office environment where it can be free standing or mounted in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Alternatively the 3300 In Line Power Unit can be rack mounted in a wiring closet or equipment room A rack mounting kit containing two mounting brackets and six screws is supplied with the 3300 In Line Power Unit
261. tance from 600 to 1800 ohms Release 3 3 Specifications OPS Line Card Specifications Variants Available A law UK u law NA Number of Circuits per Card 8 OPS Circuits Power Consumption UK 8 53 Watts NA 8 67 Watts External Loop Resistance 1800 ohms maximum External Wire Resistance 1600 ohms maximum External Loop Length 5853 meters 19022 ft 26 AWG 27 IWG 15240 meters 49530 ft 22 AWG 23 IWG Minimum Conductor Leakage 1500 ohms Loop Detector Threshold 12 mA 1 mA Trip Battery Silent Interval 50 Vdc nominal Trip Battery Ringing Interval 50 Vdc nominal Bridged Ringers 5 C4 or equivalent Ringing Voltage and Frequency 82 to 90 Vrms 17 to 25 Hz Features Provided 2 wire 4 wire conversion A D D A Conversion DC Loop Supervision and Dial Pulse Collection Ground Button Detection and Ring Lead Current Limiting Self Test Capability Automatic Card Identification Compliance Complies with all pertinent sections of EIA Standard RS 464 OPS Line Card Message Waiting Switches Eight message waiting switches S1 through S8 are mounted on the OPS card These switches are used to select the type of message waiting signaling employed on each of the eight OPS line card circuits Each circuit provides two message waiting switch types Message Waiting Switch Types Setting
262. ternal Loop Length 7986 meters 25955 ft 26 AWG 27 IWG 19995 meters 64984 ft 22 AWG 23 IWG Minimum Conductor Leakage 30000 ohms 80 Release 3 3 Specifications Features Provided 2 wire 4 wire conversion A D D A conversion address signaling MF R1 DTMF or dial pulse incoming outgoing both way selection independent gain control for incoming and outgoing mode software selectable balance networks tip ground and ring ground sensing protection isolation against foreign potentials forward reverse loop voltage sensing incoming DC loop supervision and debounced dial pulse collection incoming forward or reverse battery feed battery ground pulsing optional backwards busying self test capability automatic card identification Compliance Complies with all pertinent sections of EIA Standard RS 464 Operation The DID LT trunk card is software controlled by the Main Controller The DID LT trunk card can maintain voice and data communications through four trunks supported by the DID LT trunk card in both incoming and outgoing modes For example the DID LT trunk card interfaces incoming DID trunks from a CO and incoming and outgoing trunks between co related systems Any combination of these applications can be handled by the DID LT trunk card DNI Line Card The Digital Network Interface DNI Line Card provides 16 voice and data lines The DNI line card provides an interface for MITEL digital
263. the 3300 ICP The options are configured simultaneously on all PRI cards installed on the 3300 ICP This means for example that if Min Max were enabled every PRI card in the 3300 ICP would have this feature enabled Release 3 3 97 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 98 Software Upgrades The PRI card has factory installed software and a default database for each variant UK and NA Use IMAT to make changes to the database Use IMAT to upgrade PRI card software and install or restore the database See your IMAT online Help for more information Details of how to perform software upgrades are given in Upgrade the PRI Software provided in the IMAT On Line Help Multiple ISDN Variants and Configurations The PRI card supports the option to program multiple ISDN variants and configurations through IMAT This option provides the ability to do the following Program multiple ISDN variants on the two links of the PRI Gateway allowing you to connect the PRI Gateway to two different Central Office switches for example DMS 100 and Bellcore Program multiple ISDN configurations on the two links of the PRI Gateway For example program Network side on one link of the PRI Gateway and program User side on the other link ofthe PRI Gateway The PRI Gateway can act as both the User side and Network side and still run different protocols For example one link can be User side running DMS 100 and the other link can be Network side running Bel
264. the device is still connected When the hub no longer detects the looped back probing signal it assumes the terminal device has been disconnected and disables power to that port The Catalyst 3500 4000 and 6000 series products provide 48VDC on the data pairs 1 2 and 3 6 Before applying this voltage on its port the Cisco hub first ensures that the attached device is capable of accepting power It does this by transmitting a Fast Link Pulse FLP on one data pair while monitoring the second data pair A power ready device will loop back this signal to the hub via the second data pair Once the hub senses this return signal it ramps up voltage on the port Once enabled the port continues to provide power provided the link signal from the terminal device is present When this signal disappears the port interprets this as a disconnection of the terminal device and then disables power to that port PowerDsine In line Power Unit PowerDsine 24PT In line Power Unit Components The PowerDsine In Line Power Unit PD PH 6024 AC 48 has the following hardware features Remote power feeding of Ethernet terminals Eliminates the need for terminal s AC outlets UPS and AC DC adapters 24 10 100BaseT data power combined channels Universal 100 240VAC 50 60Hz power input Independent overload amp short circuit protection for each channel Bicolor LED Port Status Indicators RS 232 software download monitoring and control serial port e Stand
265. tions Pin Signal Pin Signal Note Connection of the Tip and Ring A and B leads of the ONS lines and LS trunk circuits are through a 25 pair female D type connector 1 ONS Tip 1 26 ONS Ring 1 2 ONS Tip 2 27 ONS Ring 2 3 ONS Tip 3 28 ONS Ring 3 4 ONS Tip 4 29 ONS Ring 4 5 ONS Tip 5 30 ONS Ring 5 6 ONS Tip 6 31 ONS Ring 6 7 ONS Tip 7 32 ONS Ring 7 8 ONS Tip 8 33 ONS Ring 8 9 ONS Tip 9 34 ONS Ring 9 10 ONS Tip 10 35 ONS Ring 10 11 ONS Tip 11 36 ONS Ring 11 12 ONS Tip 12 37 ONS Ring 12 13 ONS Tip 13 38 ONS Ring 13 Release 3 3 Specifications 25 pair Connector Pin Allocations continued Pin Signal Pin Signal 14 ONS Tip 14 39 ONS Ring 14 15 ONS Tip 15 40 ONS Ring 15 16 ONS Tip 16 41 ONS Ring 16 17 LS Tip 1 42 LS Ring 1 18 LS Tip 1 1 43 LS Ring 1 1 19 LS Tip 2 44 LS Ring 2 20 LS Tip 1 2 45 LS Ring 1 2 21 LS Tip 3 46 LS Ring 3 22 LS Tip 1 3 47 LS Ring 1 3 23 LS Tip 4 48 LS Ring 4 24 LS Tip 1 4 49 LS Ring 1 4 25 N C 50 N C Music on Hold Connector Pin Allocations Universal ASU only Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Tip 1 5 Ring 3 2 Ring 1 6 Ring 2 3 Tip 2 7 Tip 4 4 Tip 3 8 Ring 4 Note The four MOH tips amp rings occupy an 8 pin female modular jack located on the rear panel Note Only one port is supported through software on the system Paging Connector Pin Assignments Univ
266. trollers release 3 0 had the DSP installed in Slot 6 This DSP should be moved to Slot 8 before installing the compression DSP in Slot 3 250 User System Add 32 Compression Channels and Voice Mail Ports 250usersystem Release 3 0 3 1 chassis upgrade to add supportfor 32 compression channels and 30 voice mail ports This system uses the following existing modules Release 3 3 181 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Add the following modules One DSP Module 21161 for 32 compression channels One DSP Module 21161 for 30 voice mail ports Note You must purchase compression licenses Refer to E2T Compression for guidelines on meeting your compression requirements This provides 4 DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users 4 DSP devices 21161 for 32 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 Channels of Echo Cancellation 2 External FIM connections Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU To add 32 compression channels and additional voice mail ports to a 250 user system Release 3 0 3 1 chassis 1 Remove the cover 2 Install the additional DSP Module Slot 3 3 Replace the cover
267. tter card that has an unused hybrid circuit one Rx Tx pair configured with DPNSS protocol The system has a free DSU slot for the BRI card The wiring from the Network Termination Terminal Equipment NTTE Network Termina tion 1 NT1 or terminating equipment is Cat 5 UTP A computer is available for use as a maintenance PC Installation Sequence Install the BRI card in the following sequence Program the customer data in the 3300 ICP Install the BRI interface assembly Install the BRI card and make connections Connect the terminal equipment Install a BRI Interface Assembly To install the BRI interface assembly 1 Attach the anti static strap to your wrist Unpack the interface assembly and inspect it to ensure that it is not damaged 3 Atthe rear of the DSU cabinet locate the slot in the DSU box that corresponds to the slot in the system card frame that will be used for the BRI card The BRI card should be as close as possible to its associated CEPT card Remove the blanking plate from the selected slot Insert the interface assembly extension bracket into the slot with the closed side of the bracket to the left when viewed from the rear of the cabinet Using the screws that secured the blanking plate secure the interface assembly extension bracket into the slot Insert the interface assembly into the slot Using the screws provided secure the interface assembly to the extension bracket Release 3 3
268. uide SX 2000 LIGHT to 3300 ICP To upgrade SX 2000 LIGHT hardware for 3300 control 384 port Peripheral main control replacement DSU main control replacement Peripheral cards DNIC Line ONS CLASS ONS Line LS GS Trk E amp M Tie Trk OPS Line DID Loop Tie DSU cards T1 DS1 Formatter CEPT Interface ISDN PRI E1 T1 Dig Trk Formatter E1 R2 6CCT BRI 15CCT BRI If existing capacity is greater than that of the 3300 ICP the conversion will fail See the capacity table for the 3300 ICP The SX 2000 LIGHT Digital Services Unit DSU cabinet provides digital trunk capability and the SX 2000 LIGHT peripheral cabinet provides connectivity for analog trunks analog telephones and Mitel DNI devices Both cabinettypes can be connected to the 3300 Controller by using multi mode fiber connections The DSU cabinet supports BRI PRI T1 D4 MSDN DPNSS and DASS II trunks The peripheral cabinet supports the following analog trunks Analog CO trunks E amp M trunks Direct Inward Dial and Tie Trunks The peripheral cabinet also supports the following DNI telephones and devices SUPERSET 401 SUPERSET 401 SUPERSET 410 SUPERSET 420 SUPERSET 430 SUPERSET 4001 SUPERSET 4015 SUPERSET 4025 SUPERSET 4125 SUPERSET 4150 SUPERCONSOLE 1000 For additional information refer to SX 2000 technical documentation 194 Release 3 3 Install Upgrades and FRUs SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT to 3300 ICP To upgrade SX 2000 MICRO LIGHT
269. und the node CAUTION Power must not be applied to the Peripheral Unit until you have installed the ground cable 1 Unpack the peripheral node Check the contents against the packing list 3 Visually inspect the node and attached equipment for damage Repack and return any damaged equipment 4 Position the node Connect an external ground to the ground terminal on the rear panel of the peripheral cabinet Refer to the Safety Instructions for detailed grounding requirements These in structions are packaged with each system Peripheral Unit Card Layout Typically a peripheral cabinet is shipped with the peripheral switch controller PSC card and Fiber Interface Module FIM installed If these cards were not shipped in the cabinet install them as Field Replaceable Units FRUs You must install and cable the FIM before you install the peripheral switch controller card and power converter see Peripheral Unit FRUs section The cards in the peripheral unit should be installed in the following configuration Slot Number Card Type 1 to 12 Peripheral Interface card 13 14 15 combined Power Converter 16 Peripheral Switch Controller PSC 17 Fiber Interface Module FIM Note If you are installing an expanded Peripheral Unit or expanding an existing one the card layout will be different depending on if the cabinet is used as the master or slave of the peripheral pair Release 3 3 137 33
270. unk pNI LC Plugs 34 R BR 9T 5T 5T 3T 3T 5T 9T 9 BR R 9R 5R 5R 3R 3R 5R 9R 35 R S 10T 5MWB 5T MR 3 1 10T 10 S R 108 5MWA 5R MR 3R1 10R 36 BK BL 11T 6T 6T 3E 4T 6T 11T 11 BL BK 11R 6R 6R 3SG 4R 6R 11R 37 BK O 12T 6MWB 6T MR 3 12T 12 O BK 12R 6MWA 6R MR 35 12R 38 BK G 13T 4T 7T 13T P2 13 13R 7R 7R 4R 7R 13R 39 BK BR 14T 7MWB 7T MR 4 1 14T 14 BR BK 14R 7MWA 7R MR 481 14R 40 BK S 15T 8T 8T 4E 8T 15T 15 S BK 15R 8R 8R 4SG 8R 15R 41 Y BL 16T 8MWB 8T MR 4M 16T 16 BL Y 16R 8MWA 8R MR 45 16R Card Slot 3 Card Slot 3 Connections To Cross Connect Field Color OPS LS GS E amp M DID LT DID 2 Backplane pin Code ONSLC LC Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk BNIES Plugs 42 Y O 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 1T 17 0 Y 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 1R 43 Y G 2T 1MWB 1T MR 1T1 2T 18 G Y 2R 1MWA 1R MR 1R1 2R 44 3T 2T 2T 1E 2T 2T 3T 19 BR Y 2R 2R 1SG 2R 2R 3R 45 YIS 4T 2MWB 2T MR 1M 4T 20 5 4R 2MWA 2R MR 1SB 4R 46 V IBL 5 3T 3T 2T 3T 5T P1 21 5R 3R 3R 2R 3R 5R 47 6T 3MWB 3T MR 2T1 6T 22 6R 3MWA 3R MR 281 6R 48 V G 4T 4T 2E 4T 7T 23 G V 7R 4R 4R 2SG 4R 7R 49 V BR_ 8T 4MWB 4T MR 2 8T 24 8 4MWA 4R MR 25 8R 50 de qe or SPARE 25 0 qe SPARE Release 3 3 147 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 148 Card Slot 3 Connections To Cross Connect Field
271. uous Busy 480 620 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Camp on 440 0 1 on 0 05 off repeat x 2 Conference 440 1 on off Confirmation 350 440 Continuous Dial Tone 350 440 Continuous Feature Active Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Interrupted Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 8 then continuous Message Notification 350 440 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 4 then 440 0 2 on 0 2 off x 2 then 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 4 then 350 440 continuous Modem Answer 2025 0 95 on 005 off repeat Override 440 0 8 on off Paging 440 0 2 on off Reorder 480 620 0 25 on 0 25 off repeat Ringback 440 480 1 on 3 off repeat Special Busy 480 620 0 5 on 0 5 off repeat Special Ringback 440 480 0 5 on 0 5 off 0 5 on 2 5 off repeat Transfer Dial 350 440 0 1 on 0 1 off x 3 then continuous Voice Mail 440 0 6 on off Tone Output Level iONS ONS iOPS OPS iACO iACOs ACO ACOs DCO ATT ARS 2nd Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Busy 27 27 27 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Camp on 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Conference 19 19 19 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Confirmation 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Feature Active Dial 22 22 22 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 Interrupted Dial 23 23 23 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Message Notification 17 17 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 Modem Answer 20 20 20 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 Override 17 17 17 14 14 14 14
272. ures Provided transfers data at 2 048 Mb s over DPNSS digital links Release 3 3 91 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 92 CEPT Link The CEPT digital link complies with the European standards specified by the CCITT International Committee for Telephone and Telegraph G703 and G734 The technical characteristics of the CEPT link are thirty 64 Kbps traffic channels two 64 Kbps framing and signaling channels eight consecutive bits per channel channel sampling rate 8 000 Hz total bit rate 8000 frames second X 8 bits X 32 channels 2 048 Mbps CEPT Interface Assembly Jumpers There are four jumpers and eight jumper positions J06 to J13 Jumper positions J06 to J09 allow you to ground the shields of the coaxial cable connectors and jumper positions J10 to J13 provide a location to affix the jumpers if they are not in the grounding position EZ Note Jumpers J06 J07 J08 JO9 J11 and J12 are located beneath the side of the faceplate Use needlenose pliers to change the positions of these jumpers CEPT Interface Assembly Connector Shield Grounding Circuit 0 Circuit 1 RX grounded jumper across J06 RX grounded jumper across J08 RX not grounded no jumper across JO6 RX not grounded no jumper across J08 TX grounded jumper across J07 TX grounded jumper across J09 TX not grounded jumper across JO7 TX not grounded no jumper across J09 Note Default settings are shown
273. vides communications with the 3300 Controller for the DSU cards in slots 2 and 3 and the FIM in the bottom of slot 6 provides communications for the DSU cards in slots 4 and 5 You mustinstall and cable the FIMs before you install any cards in the DSU node RESOURCE CARD cc LL a FIBER INTERFACE MODULE DIGITAL SERVICE UNIT DIGITAL SERVICE UNIT DIGITAL SERVICE UNIT DIGITAL SERVICE UNIT FIBER INTERFACE MODULE RR410 DSU Card Layout Connect Fiber Cable to the DSU The fiber optic cable connects the FIMs in the 3300 Controller to the FIMs in the DSU node To connect the fiber optic cable to the FIM in the peripheral node 1 2 Review the guidelines for handling fiber optic cable Route the fiber optic cable through the sliding cable port at the rear of the DSU cabinet into the cabinet Extend the fiber cable approximately 30 cm 1 ft beyond the front of the cabinet Install a short piece of nylon spiral wrap over the cable at the point where the cable exits the rear of the cabinet Close the sliding cable port door Ensure that the door closes on the nylon spiral wrapped section of fiber cable Remove the plastic dust caps from the fiber optic cable and the connector ferrules on the FIM faceplate Plug the fiber connectors into the connectors on the FIM faceplate The fiber connectors have a small key that must be aligned with a slot on the FIM connectors Lock each
274. view of the Digital Service Unit Installation WARNING Power must not be applied to the equipment at any time during equipment installation To installa DSU Node D E D c Unpack position and ground the DSU Node Check the card layout Connect the fiber cable to the node Install the DSU cards Install the interface assembly on cards Install the DS1 interface assembly and cabling Install the CEPT interface assembly and cabling Power up the DSU Once you have completed these steps you can return to System Installation Overview Unpack Position and Ground the DSU To unpack and position the DSU Node CAUTION Do not open or unpack any printed circuit board cartons at this time 1 Open the DSU node carton Remove the plastic bag from the top and sides of the cabinet Lift the DSU node out of the carton Check that the node and all attached equipment are undamaged Repack and return any damaged equipment 4 Place the node in its assigned position 5 Remove the DSU node front panel CAUTION Ensure that you use the Cabinet Stacking Brackets if you want to stack cabinets on top of each other Stacking cabinets without these brackets could result in damage to the equipment or injury 160 Release 3 3 Installing DSU Card Layout Each DSU node has one or two FIMs depending on the number and location of DSU cards installed in the node The FIM in the bottom of slot 1 pro
275. will be restoring a database 37 1 the Selection drop down menu click Maintenance and Diagnostics and then click Restore 38 Type the location of the database that is being restored or use the browse facility 39 Click Start Restore A window warns you that you must manually reboot after a restore and that a restore replaces the current database 40 Click OK The system will show an in progress message and then a complete message 41 Click OK 42 Click the Exit button until you are logged out of ESM 43 Manually reset the system by pressing the Reset button on the 3300 Controller Note The system does not allow you to log in during the restore and reset period Once the system has completed the restore and reset you should see deleting ipservicesdb tar in the RTC This is a good indication that you can log back in to the 3300 ESM Release 3 3 201 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 202 Timer The system takes approximately 20 minutes to restore an average sized database during which time the files are copied to the 3300 Controller Once the files have been copied you must reset the controller Note that the system can take up to an additional 1 hour to reset Performing maintenance checks Do not reset any system components controller NSU ASU DSU Peripheral Cabinet and so on while executing the following checks 44 When the system has finished resetting log back in to ESM using the customer s user n
276. xternal loop resistance exceeds 600 ohms or where lightning surge protection is required Note AC15 Trunk Cards and COV Line Cards are not supported LS GS Trunk Card The LS GS trunk card is used to terminate eight central office CO trunks The LS GS trunk card connects to any Peripheral Interface card slot on the peripheral shelf via connectors J1 and J2 The alternate LS GS trunk card Layout is currently only available in Germany LS GS Trunk Card Specifications Variants Available p law NA A law UK N Z UK Italy Germany Number of Circuits per Card 8 LS GS trunk circuits Power Consumption NA UK NZ Italy 4 20 watts Germany 3 36 watts External Loop Resistance 2367 ohms includes CO feed resistance and is measured based on 48 V 18mA Features Provided 2 wire 4 wire conversion A D D A conversion address Signaling MF R1 DTMF or dial pulse programmable loop start or ground start mode balanced network selection gain control circuit descriptor tip ground and ring ground detection metering 12 kHz Italy 16 kHz Germany 50 kHz UK or dc message registration NA self test capability automatic card identification Compliance Complies with all pertinent sections of EIA Standard RS 464 NA BTR Spec 1050 UK and NZ and FTZ 123 R 1 standards for Germany Operation The LS GS trunk card interfaces with analog central office CO trunks on either a 48
277. z RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 64 Channel Echo Canceller One Dual FIM One DSP Module 21061 21161 for telecom support Two DSP Modules 21161 for 64 channels of compression DSP Module 21161 for 30 Voice Mail Ports This provides Four DSP devices 21061 21161 for telecom functions for up to 250 users Eight 21161 DSP devices for 64 channels of compression 30 Voice Mail Ports 64 channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU 250 User System With 64 Compression Channels Slot 8 Slot 7 Slot 5 21161 DSP 21161 DSP 64 Channel Telecom Telecom Echo Canceller Slot 3 Slot 4 21161 DSP 21161 DSP Compression Compression IP0479 Release 3 3 51 3300 ICP Hardware User Guide 700 User System without Compression This system uses One 300 MHz RTC One 300 MHz E2T One 128 Channel Echo Canceller Two Dual FIMs Two DSP Modules 21061 21161 for telecom support This provides Eight DSP devices for telecom functions 128 channels of Echo Cancellation Two External FIM connections e Four ASU connections CIM ports The four external FIM connections are for providing connectivity for up to four Peripheral Units or up to eight NSUs Note that there are two T1 E1 links per NSU

Mitel 3300 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents